Вы находитесь на странице: 1из 170

Copies of this document may be purchased from:

Global Engineering, 15 Inverness Way East,


Englewood, CO 80112-5704
Phone: (800) 854-7179 or (303) 792-2181 Fax: (303) 792-2192

dpANS NCITS.xxx-200x
NCITS/Project 1235D/Rev 7.2

FIBRE CHANNEL
PHYSICAL INTERFACES
(FC-PI)
REV 7.2

working draft proposed


American National Standard
for Information Systems
April 9, 2000
Secretariat:
Information Technology Industry Council
ABSTRACT: This standard describes the enhancement to the ANSI X3.230, Fibre Channel Physical and
Signalling Interface (FC-PH) and to the ANSI X3.297, Fibre Channel Physical and Signalling Interface - 2
(FC-PH-2) and is an addendum to both these documents.
NOTE:
This is a draft proposed American National Standard of Accredited Standards Committee NCITS.
As such, this is not a completed standard. The T11 Technical Committee may modify this document
as a result of comments received during public review and its approval as a standard.
POINTS OF CONTACT:
Kumar Malavali (T11 Chairman)
Brocade Communications
San Jose, CA 951??
(408)
Fax: (408)
E-Mail:
I. Dal Allan
(Fibre Channel Working Group Chairman)
ENDL
14426 Black Walnut Court
Saratoga, CA 95070
(408) 867-6630
Fax: (408) 867-2115
E-Mail: dal_allan@mcimail.com

Edward L. Grivna (T11 Vice Chairman)


Cypress Semiconductor
2401 East 86th Street
Bloomington, MN 55425
(612) 851-5046 Fax: (612) 851-5087
E-Mail: elg@cypress.com
Schelto Van Doorn (Editor)
Infineon Technologies Corporation
1730 North First Street MS 22303
San Jose, CA 95112
(408) 501-5665 Fax: (408) 501-5670
E-Mail: schelto.vandoorn@infineon.com

ANSI
dpANS NCITS.xxx-200x

American National Standard

for Information Technology


Fibre Channel Physical Interfaces
(FC-PI)

Secretariat

Information Technology Industry Council

Approved

, 200

American National Standards Institute, Inc.

Abstract
This standard describes the enhancement to the ANSI X3.230, Fibre Channel Physical and Signalling Interface (FC-PH) and to the ANSI X3.297, Fibre Channel Physical and Signalling Interface - 2 (FC-PH-2)
and is an addendum to both these documents.

ii

American
National
Standard

Approval of an American National Standard requires verification by ANSI that the


requirements for due process, consensus, and other criteria for approval have
been met by the standards developer.
Consensus is established when, in the judgement of the ANSI Board of Standards
Review, substantial agreement has been reached by directly and materially
affected interests. Substantial agreement means much more than a simple
majority, but not necessarily unanimity. Consensus requires that all views and
objections be considered, and that a concerted effort be made towards their
resolution.
The use of American National Standards is completely voluntary; their existence
does not in any respect preclude anyone, whether he has approved the standards
or not, from manufacturing, marketing, purchasing, or using products, processes,
or procedures not conforming to the standards.
The American National Standards Institute does not develop standards and will in
no circumstances give interpretation on any American National Standard.
Moreover, no person shall have the right or authority to issue an interpretation of
an American National Standard in the name of the American National Standards
Institute. Requests for interpretations should be addressed to the secretariat or
sponsor whose name appears on the title page of this standard.
CAUTION NOTICE: This American National Standard may be revised or
withdrawn at any time. The procedures of the American National Standards
Institute require that action be taken periodically to reaffirm, revise, or withdraw this
standard. Purchasers of American National Standards may receive current
information on all standards by calling or writing the American National Standards
Institute.

Published by

American National Standards Institute


11 W. 42nd Street, New York, New York 10036

Copyright 200x by American National Standards Institute


All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced in any
form, in an electronic retrieval system or otherwise,
without prior written permission of the publisher.

Printed in the United States of America


INSERT CODE HERE

iii

iv

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

Table of Contents
1 Scope

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

2 References - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2.1 Normative references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


2.1.1 Approved references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2 Informative references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3 References under development . . . . . . . . . .

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 Definitions and conventions - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3.1 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


3.2 Editorial conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.1 Abbreviations, acronyms, and symbols . .
3.2.2 Data rate abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.3 Synonyms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.4 Acronyms and other abbreviations . . . . .
3.3 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 Structure and Concepts - 4.1 FC-0 general description
4.2 FC-0 interface overview .
4.3 Data flow stages . . . . . .

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 FC-PI functional characteristics - - - - - - - - - - 5.1 General characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


5.2 FC-PI States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.1 Transmitter FC-PI (FC-0) States . . . . . . .
5.2.2 Receiver States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3 Response to input data phase jumps . . . . . . .
5.4 Limitations on invalid code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5 Receiver initialization time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6 Loss of signal (Rx_LOS) function . . . . . . . . . .
5.7 FC-PI nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.8 Interoperability points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.9 FC-PI technology options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

6 Optical interface specification - - - - - - - - - - - - 6.1 SM data links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


6.1.1 SM optical output interface . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.2 SM optical input interface . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.3 SM jitter budget . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.4 SM tradeoffs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2 MM data links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.1 MM short wavelength (SW) data links . . .
6.2.2 MM optical input interface . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.3 MM jitter budget . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

7 Optical interface receptacle specifications


7.1 SC optical interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.1 Performance requirements . . . . . .
7.1.2 SC optical plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.3 SC Duplex optical receptacle . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15
15
15
15
17
17
19
19
23
24
24
24
25
26
27
28
30
31
32
32
33
33
34
34
34
34
34
35
36
42
45
45
45
48
48
50
52
52
52
55
57
57
57
57
58
5

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

7.2 SG optical interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


7.2.1 SG optical receptacle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.2 SG optical connector plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3 LC optical interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3.1 LC optical receptacle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3.2 LC optical plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4 MT-RJ optical interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.1 MT-RJ optical receptacle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.2 MT-RJ optical connector plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.3 Alignment pin/alignment structure diameter option

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8 Optical fiber cable plant specification - - - - - - - - - 8.1 SM cable plant specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


8.1.1 SM optical fiber type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1.2 SM cable plant loss budget . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1.3 SM optical return loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2 MM cable plant specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.1 MM optical fiber types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.2 MM modal bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.3 MM cable plant loss budget . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.4 MM optical return loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.5 MM chromatic dispersion parameters . . . . . .
8.3 Connectors and splices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

9 Electrical cable interface specification - - - - - - - - 9.1 Transmitted signal characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . .


9.2 Received signal characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.3 Jitter characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.4 Eye masks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.4.1 Transmitted eye mask at T, T and T. . . . . .
9.4.2 Received eye mask at R, R and R. . . . . . . .
9.4.3 Jitter tolerance masks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.5 Impedance specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.6 Electrical TxRx connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.7 Compliance points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.8 Driver characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.9 Receiver characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.10 Example TxRx connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

67
67
67
67
67
67
68
68
68
68
69
69

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

71
72
74
75
77
77
78
78
80
81
81
83
83
84

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10 Electrical cable plant and connector specifications 10.1 Shielding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


10.2 Cable interoperability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.3 Unbalanced cable connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.3.1 Inter-enclosure connectors for unbalanced cable
10.3.2 Intra-enclosure connectors for unbalanced cable
10.4 Balanced cable connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.4.1 Inter-enclosure connectors for balanced cable .
10.4.2 Intra-enclosure connectors for balanced cable .
10.4.3 Non-device inter-enclosure connectors . . . . . .
Annex A (informative)
Test Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.1 Transmit interface . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.1.1 Optical spectrum measurement

58
58
60
61
61
63
64
64
65
66

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

85
85
85
85
85
86
87
87
89
91

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

93
93
93

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A.1.2 Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.1.3 Jitter measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.2 Receive interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.3 Poormans curve fit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.4 Relative intensity noise (RIN) (OMA) measuring procedure . . .
A.4.1 Test objective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.4.2 General test description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.4.3 Component descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.4.4 Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.5 Optical modulation amplitude (OMA) test procedure . . . . . . . .
A.6 Optical receiver stress test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.7 Measurement of the receiver electrical upper cutoff frequencies
Annex B
Electrical interface example (informative) . . . . . . . . . .
B.1 Communications levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.1.1 PECL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.1.2 SSTL_2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.2 Serial interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.2.1 Transmit serial interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.2.2 Receiver serial interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.2.3 Receiver retimed clock and data serial interface
B.3 Parallel interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.3.1 Voltage levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.3.2 Bus data rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.3.3 Transmit parallel interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.3.4 Receive parallel interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.4 REFCLK[0:1] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.5 Support functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.5.1 Acquisition of receiver bit synchronization . . .
B.5.2 Receive byte alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.5.3 Loopback function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Annex C (informative)
Optical cable plant usage

93
. 93
94
94
95
. 95
. 96
. 96
. 97
98
99
101

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

103
104
104
105
105
105
106
106
106
106
106
106
108
109
109
109
110
110

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

111

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Annex D (informative)
Optical Receptacle Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D.1 Combined Connector Mechanical-Optical Requirements
D.2 Receptacle axial pull test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D.3 Receptacle insertion/withdrawal force test . . . . . . . . . .
D.4 Receptacle optical repeatability test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D.5 Receptacle optical cross plug repeatability test . . . . . . .
D.6 Plug axial pull test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D.7 Plug insertion/withdrawal force test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D.8 Plug off axis pull test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D.9 Cable/ plug pull strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Annex E (normative)
Tx-Off and Rx-Loss of Signal detection .
E.1 Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E.2 Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E.3 Functional and Timing Specifications
E.3.1 Tx_Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

113
113
114
114
114
114
114
114
114
115

117
117
117
118
118

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

E.3.2 Rx_LOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E.4 Optical Tx_Off and Rx_LOS Signal Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E.5 Electrical Tx_Off Signal Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E.6 Electrical Rx_LOS Signal Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E.7 Methods of Measurement for Electrical Rx_LOS Thresholds
(informative) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Annex F (informative)
SG optical connector requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F.1.1 Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F.1.2 Related Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F.1.3 Product Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F.1.4 TIA 604 (FOCIS) Connector Specifications . . .
F.1.5 Optical Fiber Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F.1.6 Fiber Optic Communications Cable Specification
F.1.7 Supplementary information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F.2 Outline drawings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F.3 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F.3.1 Dimensional requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F.3.2 Performance requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F.4 Measurement and performance requirements . . . .
F.4.1 Visual and mechanical inspection: FOTP 13
F.4.2 Attenuation: FOTP 34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F.4.3 Return loss: FOTP 107 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F.4.4 Low temperature: FOTP 188 . . . . . . . . . . .
F.4.5 Temperature life: FOTP 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F.4.6 Humidity: FOTP 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F.4.7 Strength of coupling mechanism: FOTP 185
F.4.8 Durability: FOTP 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F.4.9 Impact: FOTP 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F.4.10 Flex: FOTP 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F.4.11 Twist: FOTP 36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F.4.12 Cable retention: FOTP 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Annex J (informative)
LC optical connector requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J.1.1 Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J.1.2 Related documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J.1.3 Product Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J.1.4 TIA 604 (FOCIS) Connector Specifications . . .
J.1.5 Optical Fiber Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J.1.6 Fiber Optic Communications Cable Specification
J.1.7 Supplementary information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J.2 OUTLINE DRAWINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J.3 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J.3.1 Dimensional Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J.3.2 Performance Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J.4 Measurement and performance requirements . . . . .
J.4.1 Visual and Mechanical Inspection: FOTP 13
J.4.2 Attenuation: FOTP 34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J.4.3 Return Loss: FOTP 107 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J.4.4 Low Temperature: FOTP 188 . . . . . . . . . . .
8

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

118
119
119
119

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

120

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

121
122
122
123
125
127
128
128
130
132
132
132
132
134
134
134
134
134
134
135
135
135
135
136
136
136

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

138
139
139
140
142
144
145
145
146
148
148
148
149
149
149
149
150
150
8

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

J.4.5 Temperature Life: FOTP 4 . . . . . . . . . . . .


J.4.6 Humidity: FOTP 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J.4.7 Strength of Coupling Mechanism: FOTP 185
J.4.8 Durability: FOTP 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J.4.9 Impact: FOTP 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J.4.10 Flex: FOTP 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J.4.11 Twist: FOTP 36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J.4.12 Cable Retention: FOTP 6 . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Annex K (informative)
MT-RJ Optical Connector Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . .
K.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
K.1.1 Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
K.1.2 Related Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
K.1.3 Product Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
K.1.4 TIA 604 (FOCIS) Connector Specifications . . .
K.1.5 TIA 604-12 (FOCIS-12) Adapter Designation . .
K.1.6 Optical Fiber Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
K.1.7 Fiber Optic Communications Cable Specification
K.1.8 SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION . . . . . . . .
K.2 OUTLINE DRAWINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
K.3 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
K.3.1 Dimensional Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
K.3.2 Performance Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
K.4 Measurement and performance requirements . . . .
K.4.1 Visual and mechanical inspection: FOTP 13
K.4.2 Attenuation: FOTP 34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
K.4.3 Return Loss: FOTP 107 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
K.4.4 Low Temperature: FOTP 188 . . . . . . . . . . .
K.4.5 Temperature Life: FOTP 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
K.4.6 Humidity: FOTP 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
K.4.7 Strength of Coupling Mechanism: FOTP 185
K.4.8 Durability: FOTP 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
K.4.9 Impact: FOTP 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
K.4.10 Flex: FOTP 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
K.4.11 Twist: FOTP 36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
K.4.12 Cable Retention: FOTP 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

150
150
151
151
151
151
152
152

154
155
155
156
158
160
161
161
162
163
165
166
166
166
167
167
167
167
167
167
168
168
168
168
169
169
169

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

10

10

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

List of figures
Figure 1. Fibre channel structure - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 2. Node functional configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 3. FC-0 Link - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 4. Fabric - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 5. FC-0 Path - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 6. Fibre channel building wiring - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 7. Data flow stages - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 8. FC variant nomenclature - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 9. Example of physical location of reference and interoperability points - - - Figure 10. Use of Internal Connector and Retimer - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 11. Media interchange component TX interoperability point examples - - - - Figure 12. Media interchange component RX interoperability point examples - - - - Figure 13. Hub interoperability point example - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 14. Examples of interoperability points - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 15. Overview of the signal specification architecture - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 16. Transmitter eye diagram mask - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 17. Sinusoidal jitter mask - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 18. 1.06GBd SM 10km link - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 19. 2.12GBd SM 10km link - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 20. 4.25GBd SM 10km link - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 21. SC optical connector - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 22. SG receptacle - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 23. SG connector plug envelope dimensions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 24. LC connector - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 25. LC receptacle dimensions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 26. LC Connector Plug Envelope Dimensions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 27. MT connector and receptacle - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 28. Active Device receptacle Interface - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 29. MT-RJ Connector Plug Interface Dimensions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 30. Normalized (left) and absolute (right) eye diagram masks at T, T and T.
Figure 31. Eye diagram mask at R, R and R - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 32. Sinusoidal jitter mask - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 33. Inter-enclosure transmitter compliance point T - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 34. Inter-enclosure receiver compliance point R - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 35. Intra-enclosure transmitter compliance point T - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 36. Intra-enclosure receiver compliance point R - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 37. Test loads - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 38. Example xxx-SE-EL-S inter-enclosure
TxRx connection with 75 unbalanced cable - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 39. Example xxx-DF-EL-S inter-enclosure TxRx with 150 balanced cable Figure 40. Balanced cable wiring - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 41. Style-1 balanced connector receptacle contact locations - - - - - - - - - - Figure 42. Style-2 plug and receptacle - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 43. Style-2 balanced connector receptacle contact locations - - - - - - - - - - Figure 44. Intra-enclosure integral FC device connector - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure 45. Contact numbering for integral FC device connector - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure A.1. Eye diagram - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure A.2. RIN (OMA) test setup - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Figure A.3. Optical modulation amplitude test equipment configuration - - - - - - - - Figure A.4. Optical modulation amplitude waveform measurement - - - - - - - - - - - Figure A.5. Required characteristics of the conformance test signal at gR - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

27
28
29
29
29
30
31
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
45
49
50
51
51
57
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
77
78
79
82
82
82
82
83
84
84
87
88
88
89
90
91
95
96
98
99
100
11

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

Figure A.6.
Figure A.7.
Figure B.1.
Figure B.2.
Figure B.3.
Figure B.4.
Figure B.5.
Figure B.6.
Figure B.7.
Figure H.1.
Figure H.2.
Figure H.3.
Figure H.4.
Figure H.5.
Figure H.6.
Figure H.7.
Figure K.1.
Figure K.2.
Figure K.3.

Apparatus for generating stressed receive conformance test signal at gR


Test setup for receiver bandwidth measurement - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Fibre channel electrical interface example block diagram - - - - - - - - - PECL communication levels - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - SSTL_2 compatible communication levels - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Retimed interface signal timing - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Transmit parallel interface timings: 106,25 MBd - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Transmit parallel interface timings: 212,5 MBd - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Receive parallel interface timings: 106,25 MBd - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Assembled connector set. type SG connector - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - FOCIS 7 kit arrangement - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - FOCIS 7 pach cord arrangements - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Assembled connector set, type LC connector - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - FOCIS 10 Kit Arrangements - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - FOCIS 10 Duplex Adapter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - FOCIS 10 pachtch cord arrangements - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Assembled Connector Set, Type MT-RJ Connector - - - - - - - - - - - - - MT-RJ Plug Kit Arrangements - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Variant A MT-RJ Adapter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

101
101
104
105
105
106
107
107
108
121
132
132
138
148
148
148
154
165
165

12

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

List of Tables
Table 1. ISO convention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2. Data rate abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3. Acronyms and other abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 4. Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 5. FC-PI technology options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 6. Singlemode link classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 7. Transmit pulse noise filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 8. Tx Pulse Noise Filter Attenuation Tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 9. SM jitter output, pk-pk, max . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 10. SM jitter tolerance, pk-pk, min. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 11. Multimode 50 mm link classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 12. Multimode 62.5 mm link classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 13. MM jitter output, pk-pk, max . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 14. MM jitter tolerance, pk-pk, min. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 15. Dimensional table for SG receptacle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 16. Dimensional table for SG plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 17. Dimensions of the active device receptacle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 18. Dimensional table for LC plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 19. MT-RJ active device receptacle dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 20. Dimensional table for MT-RJ plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 21. Alignment pin/alignment structure diameter options for FOCIS 12 plugs
Table 22. Single-mode cable plant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 23. Multimode cable plant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 24. Multimode fiber types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 25. Multimode bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 26. General electrical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 27. Transmitted signal characteristics at T, T and T . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 28. Delivered signal characteristics to R, R and gR . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 29. Jitter output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 30. Jitter tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 31. FC-PI measured impedance 1,2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 32. Optional inter-enclosure contact uses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A.1. Filter 3 dB point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table D.1. Multimode cable link power budget . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table D.2. Alternate (lower bandwidth) multimode cable link power budget . . . . .
Table D.3. Alternate (higher bandwidth) multimode cable link power budget . . . . .
Table E.1. Plug/Receptacle Mechanical-Optical Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table E.2. Connector test tolerances. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table G.1. Tx-Off timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table G.2. Rx-LOS timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table G.3. Optical Rx_LOS Detection Thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table G.4. Electrical Rx_LOS Detection Thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table H.1. Variant position #1 indicates Component Arrangement: . . . . . . . . . . .
Table H.2. Variant position #2 indicates Component Configuration: . . . . . . . . . . .
Table H.3. Variant position #3 indicates the Optical Fiber Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table H.4. Variant position #4 indicates the fiber Coating / Buffer Sizes . . . . . . . .
Table H.5. Variant position #5 indicates the number of cabled fibers . . . . . . . . . .
Table H.6. Variant position #6 indicates the Cable Designation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table H.7. Variant position #7 indicates the Cable Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table H.8. Optical Fiber Transmission Performance Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .
Table H.9. Variant identification numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .

.24
.24
.25
.26
.42
.46
.47
.47
.48
.49
.53
.54
.55
.55
.59
.60
.62
.63
.65
.66
.66
.67
.67
.68
.68
.71
.72
.74
.75
.76
.80
.87
97
111
111
112
113
113
118
118
119
119
125
125
126
126
126
126
126
129
131
13

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

Table I.1.
Table I.2.
Table I.3.
Table I.4.
Table I.5.
Table I.6.
Table I.7.
Table I.8.
Table I.9.
Table K.1.
Table K.2.
Table K.3.
Table K.4.
Table K.5.
Table K.6.
Table K.7.
Table K.8.
Table K.9.

Variant position #1 indicates Component Arrangement . . . . .


Variant position #2 indicates Component Configuration . . . .
Variant position #3 indicates the Optical Fiber Type . . . . . . .
Variant position #4 indicates the fiber Coating / Buffer Sizes .
Variant position #5 indicates the number of cabled fibers . . .
Variant position #6 indicates the Cable Designation . . . . . . .
Variant position #7 indicates the Cable Length . . . . . . . . . . .
Optical Fiber Transmission Performance Requirements . . . .
Variant identification numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Variant position #1 indicates Component Arrangement . . . .
Variant position #2 indicates Component Configuration . . . .
Variant position #3 indicates the Optical Fiber Type . . . . . .
Variant position #4 indicates the fiber Coating / Buffer Sizes
Variant position #5 indicates the number of cabled fibers . . .
Variant position #6 indicates the Cable Designation . . . . . .
Variant position #7 indicates the Cable Length . . . . . . . . . .
Optical Fiber Transmission Performance Requirements . . .
Variant identification numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

142
143
143
143
143
144
144
146
147
158
159
159
159
159
160
160
162
164

14

draft proposed NCITS StandardXX-00-199x

draft proposed NCITS Standard


for Information Technology

Fibre Channel
Physical Interface (FC-PI)

Scope

This International Standard describes the physical interface of high performance serial links for
support of the Upper Level Protocols (ULPs) associated with HIPPI, IPI, SCSI, IP and others.
This Standard incorporates features from the standards described in clause 2. Where needed,
changes are or have been proposed to the appropriate ANSI NCITS technical committees to ensure
this document remains a strict ANSI standard.

References

The following standards contain provisions which, through reference in this text, constitute provisions
of this International Standard. At the time of publication, the editions indicated were valid. All
standards are subject to revision, and parties to agreements based on this International Standard are
encouraged to investigate the possibility of applying the most recent editions of the following list of
standards. Members of IEC and ISO maintain registers of currently valid International Standards.
Copies of the following documents can be obtained from ANSI: Approved ANSI standards, approved
and draft international and regional standards (ISO, IEC, CEN/CENELEC, ITUT), and approved
foreign standards (including BSI, JIS, and DIN). For further information, contact ANSI Customer
Service Department at 212-642-4900 (phone), 212-302-1286 (fax) or via the World Wide Web at
http://www.ansi.org.
2.1

Normative references

2.1.1 Approved references


[1]

IEC 169-8 - R.F. Coaxial Connectors with Inner Diameter of Outer Conductor 6.5 mm (0.256 in)
with Bayonet Lock (Type BNC)

[2]

IEC 169-17 - R.F. Coaxial Connectors with Inner Diameter of Outer Conductor 6.5 mm (0.256
in) with Threaded Lock (Type TNC)

[3]

IEC-169-15 - R.F. Coaxial Connectors (SMA)****

[4]

IEC 61754-4 ???????????????????

[5]

IEC 61754-4-5 ??????????????//

[6]

IEC 807-3 - DB9****

[7]

ANSI/TIA/EIA-604: Fiber Optic Connector Intermateability Standards (FOCIS), Nov. 1993

[8]

FOCIS7 (ANSI/TIA/EIA-604-7): - Fiber Optic Connector Intermateability Standard Type SG,


1999.

15

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

[9]

ANSI/TIA/EIA-604-10: FOCIS 10, Fiber Optic Connector Intermateability Standard Type LC,
1999.

[10] ANSI/TIA/EIA 604-12: FOCIS 12, Fiber Optic Connector Intermateability Standard Type MTRJ, (Currently pending public review in the development process by TIA FO-6.3 as SP 4172).
[11] FOTP-6 (EIA/TIA-455-6B) - Cable Retention Test Procedure for Fiber Optic Cable
Interconnecting (March 1992)
[12] FOTP-29 (EIA/TIA-455-29A) - Refractive Index Profile, Transverse Interference Method: 1st
Ed. Aug. 1981, 2nd Ed. Oct. 1989. (Measures core diameter, numerical aperture, and refractive
index profile of multimode fiber) Reaffirmed 02/08/1999 until 02/2004
[13] FOTP-30 (EIA/TIA-455-30B) - Frequency Domain Measurement of Multimode Optical Fiber
Information Transmission Capacity: 1st Ed. Sept. 1982, 2nd Ed. Aug. 1988, 3rd Ed. Oct. 1991
[14] FOTP-34 (EIA/TIA-455-34A) - Interconnection Device Insertion Loss Test, November 1995
[15] FOTP-44 (EIA/TIA-455-44B) - Refractive Index Profile, Refracted Ray Method: 1st Ed. Jan.
1984, 2nd Ed. Oct. 1989, 3rd Ed. Sept. 1992. (Measures core diameter, numerical aperture,
and refractive index profile of multimode fiber)
[16] FOTP-47 (EIA/TIA-455-47B) - Output Farfield Radiation Pattern Measurement: 1st Ed. Sept.
1983, 2nd Ed. May 1989, 3rd Ed. Aug. 1992 (Measures numerical aperture of multimode fiber)
[17] FOTP-48 (EIA/TIA-455-48B) - Diameter Measurement of Optical Fibers Using Laser-Based
Measurement Instruments: 1st Ed. Dec. 1983, 2nd Ed. Oct. 1987, 3rd Ed. Dec. 1990
[18] FOTP-51 (EIA/TIA-455-51A) - Pulse Distortion Measurement of Multimode Glass Optical fiber
Information Transmission Capacity: 1st Ed. Sept. 1983, 2nd Ed. May 1991
[19] FOTP-54 (EIA/TIA-455-54B) - Mode Scrambler Requirements for Overfilled Launching
Conditions to Multimode Fibers: 1st Ed. Sept. 1982, 2nd Ed. Nov. 1990, 3rd Ed. Aug. 1998
[20] FOTP-58 (EIA/TIA-455-58A) - FOTP-58 Core Diameter Measurement of Graded-Index Optical
Fibers, Nov. 1990
[21] FOTP-107 (EIA/TIA-107A) - Return Loss for Fiber Optic Components: 1st Ed. Feb. 1989, 2nd
Ed. Mar. 1999
[22] FOTP-127 (EIA/TIA-455-127) - Spectral Characteristics of Multimode Laser Diodes
Performance, Nov. 1991
[23] FOTP-168 (EIA/TIA-455-168A) - Chromatic Dispersion Measurement of Multimode GradedIndex and Single-Mode Optical Fibers by Spectral Group Delay Measurement in the Time
Domain: 1st Ed. July 1987, 2nd Ed. March 1992
[24] FOTP-171 (EIA-455-171) - Attenuation by Substitution Measurement- For Short Length
Multimode and Single-Mode Fiber Cable Assemblies, July 1987
[25] FOTP-176 (EIA/TIA- 455-176) - Measurement Method for Optical Fiber Geometry by
Automated Grey-Scale Analysis. 1st Ed. June 1993, Reaffirmed 02/08/1999 until 02/2004
[26] FOTP-177 (EIA/TIA-455-177A) - Numerical Aperture Measurement of Graded-Index Optical
Fibers: 1st Ed. Nov. 1989, 2nd Ed. Aug. 1992 ("Umbrella" document, indicating factors required
by FOTP-29, FOTP-44, and FOTP-47 to map to each other)
[27] FOTP-187 (EIA/TIA-455-187) - Engagement and Separation Force Measurement of Fiber Optic
Connector Sets, June 1991, Reaffirmed 02/03/1999 until 02/2004
[28] EIA-403-A - Precision Coaxial Connectors for CATV Applications (75 Ohms)
[29] EIA/TIA-492AAAA-A - Detail Specification for 62.5 m Core Diameter/125 m Cladding
Diameter Class 1a Multimode, Graded Index Optical Waveguide Fibers, Jan. 1998
16

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

[30] EIA/TIA-492AAAB - Detailed Specification for 50 m Core Diameter/125 m Cladding


Diameter Class 1a Multimode, Graded Index Optical Waveguide Fibers, Nov. 1998
[31] EIA/TIA-492CAAA - Detail Specification for Class IVa Dispersion-Unshifted Single-Mode
Optical Waveguide Fibers Used in Communications Systems, May 1998
[32] OFSTP-2 (EIA/TIA-526-2) - Effective Transmitter Output Power Coupled into Single-Mode
Fiber Optic Cable, Oct. 1989
[33] OFSTP-3 (EIA/TIA-526-3) - Fiber Optic Terminal Equipment Receiver Sensitivity and Maximum
Receiver Input, Oct. 1989
[34] OFSTP-4 (EIA/TIA-526-4A) - Optical Eye Pattern Measurement Procedure, Nov. 1997
[35] OFSTP-7 (EIA/TIA-526-7) - Optical Power Loss Measurement of Installed Single-Mode Fiber
Cable Plant, Aug. 1998
[36] OFSTP-11 (EIA/TIA-526-11) - Measurement of Single-Reflection Power Penalty for Fiber Optic
Terminal Equipment, Dec. 1991, Reaffirmed 11/09/1998 to 11/2003
[37] OFSTP-14 (EIA/TIA-526-14A) - Optical Power Loss Measurement of Installed Multimode Fiber
Cable Plant, Nov. 1990
[38] EIA/TIA 568A - Commercial Building Telecommunications Wiring Standard, Oct. 1995
[39] Food and Drug Administration (FDA) / Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS)
Regulations 21 CFR Chapter I, Subchapter J, Part 1040.10, Performance standards for lightemitting products
[40] ANSI Z136.2-1988, Standard for the safe use of optical fiber communication systems utilizing
laser diode and LED sources
[41] IEC 60825-1, Radiation safety of laser products - Equipment classification, requirements and
user's guide, 1sr Ed. Nov. 1993, Amended Sep. 1997

[42]NCITS MJS technical report


2.2

Informative references

[43] Gigabit Ethernet Networking, Macmillen Technical Publication, ISBN 1-7870-062-0 Chapter
9, the gigabit ethernet optical link model
2.3

References under development

At the time of publication, the following referenced standards were still under development. For
information on the current status of the documents, or regarding availability, contact the relevant
standards body or other organization as indicated.
[44] FC-FS *****
[45] EIA-700-A0AF [SP-3652] Inetgral FC Device Connector
[46] SFF-8451 Specification for SCA-2 Unshielded Connections
[47] SFF-8045 40-pin SCA-2 Connector with Parallel Selection
[48] SFF-8480 Specification for HSSDB9
[49] IEC 61076-3-103 Detailed specification for rectangular connectors with non-removable ribboncable contacts on 1.25mm pitch, single row, used with high-speed serial data connector
(HSSDC)
[50] SFF-8420 Style-2 Copper Connector
17

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000


NOTE For more information on the current status of SFF documents, contact the SFF committee at 408867-6630 (phone), or 408-867-2115 (fax). To obtain copies of these documents, contact the SFF committee
at14426 Black Walnut Court, Saratoga, CA 95070 at 408-867-6630 (phone) or from FaxAccess at 408-7411600.

18

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

Definitions and conventions

For the purposes of this International Standard, the following definitions, conventions, abbreviations,
acronyms, and symbols apply.
3.1 Definitions
3.1.1 T, R: Reference points used for establishing signal budgets at the chip pins of the
transmitter and receiver in an FC device or retiming element.
3.1.2 T, R: Interoperability points used for establishing signal budget at the internal connector
nearest the alpha point unless the point also satisfies the definition for delta or gamma in
which case it must be either a delta or a gamma point
3.1.3 T, R: Interoperability points used for establishing signal budget at the internal connector of a
removable PMD element.
3.1.4 T, R: Interoperability points used for establishing signal budgets at the external enclosure
connector.
3.1.5 attenuation: The transmission medium power or amplitude loss expressed in units of dB.
3.1.6 average power: The optical power measured using an average-reading power meter when
transmitting valid 8B/10B transmission characters.
3.1.7 bandwidth: In FC-PI context, the corner frequency of a low-pass transmission characteristic,
such as that of an optical receiver. The modal bandwidth of an optical fiber medium is
expressed in units of MHz-km.
3.1.8 baud: A unit of signaling speed, expressed as the maximum number of times per second the
signal can change the state of the signal on the transmission line or other medium. (Units of
baud are sec-1) Note: With the Fibre Channel transmission scheme, a signal event
represents a single transmission bit. [(Adapted from IEEE Std. 610.7-1995 [A16].12)].
3.1.9 bit error rate (BER): The probability of a transmitted bit being erroneously received in a
communication system. BER is the number of bits output from a receiver that differ from the
transmitted bits, divided by the number of transmitted bits.
3.1.10 bit synchronization: The condition in which a receiver is delivering retimed serial data at
the required BER.
3.1.11 BNC: Acronym for a Bayonet-Neil-Councilman coaxial cable connector. Specifications for
BNC style connectors are defined in EIA/TIA 403-A and MIL-C-39012.
3.1.12 Byte: An eight-bit entity with its least significant bit denoted as bit 0 and most significant bit
as bit 7. The most significant bit is shown on the left side in FC-PH, unless specifically
indicated otherwise.
3.1.13 cable plant: All passive communications elements (e.g., optical fiber, twisted pair, coaxial
cable, connectors, splices, etc.) between a transmitter and a receiver.
3.1.14 center wavelength (laser): The value of the central wavelength of the operating, modulated
laser. This is the wavelength (see FOTP-127) where the effective optical power resides.
3.1.15 character: Any Transmission Character associated by FC-FS transmission code with a FCFS data byte or special code. Transmission characters are generated and interpreted only by
FC-FS.
3.1.16 coaxial cable: An unbalanced electrical transmission medium consisting of concentric
conductors separated by a dielectric material with the spacings and material arranged to give
a specified electrical impedance.

19

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

3.1.17

compliance point: Compliance points are defined as those interoperability points at which
the interoperability specifications are met. They may include beta, gamma, and delta points
for transmitters and receivers.

3.1.18

dispersion: A term used to denote pulse broadening and distortion. The two general
categories of dispersion are modal dispersion, due to the difference in the propagation
velocity of the propagation modes in a multimode fiber, and chromatic dispersion, due to the
difference in propagation of the various spectral components of the optical source. Similar
effects exist in electrical media when the velocity of propagation (VP) of the spectral
components of a non-sinusoidal signal are not constant over frequency.

3.1.19

duty cycle distortion (DCD): Difference in the mean pulse width of a 1 pulse compared to
the mean pulse width of a 0 pulse in a clock-like (repeating 0,1,0,1,...) bit sequence. DCD is
part of the DJ distribution and is measured at the ideal receiver threshold point.

3.1.20

electrical fall time: The time interval for the falling edge of an electrical pulse to transit
between specified percentages of the signal amplitude. In the context of FC-PI, the
measurement points are the 80% and 20% voltage levels.

3.1.21

electrical rise time: The time interval for the rising edge of an electrical pulse to transit
between specified percentages of the signal amplitude. In the context of FC-PI, the
measurement points are the 20% and 80% voltage levels.

3.1.22

Enclosure: The outermost electrically conducting boundary (that acts as an EMI barrier)
containing one or more FC devices.

3.1.23

External connector: A connector, whose purpose is to carry the FC signals into and out of
an Enclosure, that exits the Enclosure with only minor compromise to the shield
effectiveness of the Enclosure.

3.1.24

eye opening (horizontal): The time interval across the eye, measured at the average
voltage or optical power level, which contains all but 10-12 of the population at the same
level.

3.1.25

FC device: An entity that supports the FC protocol functions through one or more of the
connectors defined in this document.

3.1.26

FC device connector: A connector defined in this document which carries the FC serial
data signals into and out of the FC device.

3.1.27

fiber: A general term used to cover all transmission media specified in FC-PI (see clauses 3
and 5).

3.1.28

fiber optic cable: A jacketed optical fiber or fibers.

3.1.29

Fiber Optic Test Procedure (FOTP): Standards developed and published by the Electronic
Industries Association (EIA) under the EIA-RS-455 series of standards.

3.1.30

interface connector: An optical or electrical connector which connects the media to the
Fibre Channel transmitter or receiver. The connector set consists of a receptacle and a plug.

3.1.31

Internal connector: A connector, whose purpose is to carry the FC signals within an


enclosure (may be shielded or unshielded).

3.1.32

Internal FC Device: An FC device whose FC device connector is contained within an


enclosure.

3.1.33

Interoperability point: T, R, T, R T, R

3.1.34

intersymbol interference: The effect on a sequence of symbols in which the symbols are
distorted by transmission through a limited bandwidth medium to the extent that adjacent
symbols begin to interfere with each other.
20

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

3.1.35 jitter: The deviation from the ideal timing of an event. Jitter is composed of both
deterministic and Gaussian (random) content. Low frequency deviations are tracked by the
clock recovery circuit, and do not directly affect the timing allocations within a bit cell. Jitter
that is not tracked by the clock recovery circuit directly affects the timing allocations in a bit
cell. For FC-PI the lower cutoff frequency of the clock recovery circuit is the bit rate divided by
2500. Jitter is measured at the differential zero crossing for balanced electrical signals, the
average voltage level for unbalanced electrical signals, and the nominal receiver threshold
power level for optical systems.
3.1.36 jitter, data dependent: The jitter which is added when the transmission pattern is changed
from a clock like to a non-clock like pattern. Includes ISI.
3.1.37 jitter, deterministic (DJ): Jitter with non-Gaussian probability density function.
Deterministic jitter is always bounded in amplitude and has specific causes. Four kinds of
deterministic jitter are identified: duty cycle distortion, data dependent, sinusoidal, and
uncorrelated (to the data) bounded. DJ is characterized by its bounded, peak-to-peak value.
3.1.38 jitter, random (RJ): Jitter that is characterized by a Gaussian distribution. Random jitter is
defined to be the peak-to-peak value for a BER of 10-12, taken to be 14 times the standard
deviation of the Gaussian distribution.
3.1.39 laser chirp: A phenomenon in lasers where the wavelength of the emitted light changes
during modulation.
3.1.40 level:
1. A document artifice, e.g. FC-0, used to group related architectural functions. No specific
correspondence is intended between levels and actual implementations.
2. In FC-PI context, a specific value of voltage (e.g., voltage level).
3.1.41 limiting amplifier: An active circuit with amplitude gain that keeps the output levels within
specified levels, but does not reduce jitter.
3.1.42 link:
1. Two unidirectional fibers transmitting in opposite directions and their associated
transmitters and receivers.
2. A synonym for TxRx Connection.
3.1.43 mandatory: A function which is required to be supported by a compliant implementation of
FC-PI.
3.1.44 mode partition noise (MPN): Noise in a laser based optical communication system caused
by the changing distribution of laser energy partitioning itself among the laser modes (or
lines) on successive pulses in the data stream. The effect is a different center wavelength for
the successive pulses resulting in arrival time jitter attributable to chromatic dispersion in the
fiber.
3.1.45 Node: A collection of one or more N_Ports controlled by a level above FC-FS.
3.1.46 numerical aperture: The sine of the radiation or acceptance half angle of an optical fiber,
multiplied by the refractive index of the material in contact with the exit or entrance face. See
FOTP-177.
3.1.47 Open Fiber Control (OFC): A safety interlock system used in some early Fibre Channel
variants to control the optical power level on an open optical fiber cable. OFC is not used in
any physical variant specified by FC-PI.
3.1.48 optical fall time: The time interval required for the falling edge of an optical pulse to transit
between specified percentages of the signal amplitude. For lasers the transitions are
measured between the 80% and 20% points.
3.1.49 optical fiber: Any filament or fiber, made of dielectric material, that guides light.
21

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

3.1.50

optical fiber system test practice (OFSTP): Standards developed and published by the
Electronic Industries Association (EIA) under the EIA/TIA-526 series of standards.

3.1.51

optical modulation amplitude: The absolute difference between the optical power of a
logic one level and the optical power of a logic zero level.

3.1.52

optical receiver overload: The condition of exceeding the maximum acceptable value of
the received average optical power at point gamma R of figure 12 on page 39 to achieve a
BER < 10-12.

3.1.53

optical receiver sensitivity: The minimum acceptable value of average received signal at
point gamma R of figure 12 on page 39 to achieve a BER < 10-12. It takes into account
power penalties caused by use of a transmitter with a worst-case output. In the case of an
optical path it does not include power penalties associated with dispersion, jitter, effects
related to the modal structure of the source or reflections from the optical path. These effects
are specified separately in the allocation of maximum optical path penalty and receiver
stress-test as discribed in figure A.6 on page 99.

3.1.54

optical path penalty: A link penalty to account for those effects other than attenuation.

3.1.55

optical reference plane: The plane that defines the optical boundary between the plug and
the receptacle.

3.1.56

optical rise time: The time interval required for the rising edge of an optical pulse to transit
between specified percentages of the signal amplitude. For lasers the transitions are
measured between the 20% and 80% points.

3.1.57

optical return loss (ORL): See return loss.

3.1.58

optical stressed receiver sensitivity: !!!! need text !!!!

3.1.59

optional: Characteristics that are not required by FC-PI. However, if any optional
characteristic is implemented, it shall be implemented as defined in FC-PI.

3.1.60

plug: The cable half of the interface connector which terminates an optical or electrical
signal transmission cable.

3.1.61

Port: A generic reference to an N_Port or F_Port.

3.1.62

receiver: In FC-PI context, an electronic circuit (Rx) that converts a signal from the media
(optical or electrical) to an electrical retimed or non-retimed) serial logic signal.

3.1.63

receptacle: The fixed or stationary half of the interface connector which is part of the
transmitter or receiver.

3.1.64

reclocker: A type of repeater specifically designed to modify data edge timing such that the
data edges have a defined timing relation with respect to a bit clock recovered from the (FC)
data at its input.

3.1.65

Reference points: T, R

3.1.66

reflections: Power returned to point gamma T of figure 6 on page 30 by discontinuities in


the physical link.

3.1.67

repeater: An active circuit designed to modify the (FC) signals that pass through it by
changing any or all of the following parameters of that signal: amplitude, slew rate, and edge
to edge timing. Repeaters have jitter transfer characteristics. Types of repeaters include
retimers, reclockers and amplifiers.

3.1.68

retimer: A type of repeater specifically designed to modify data edge timing such that the
data edges have a defined timing relation with respect to a bit clock derived from a timing
reference other than the (FC) data at its input. A retimer shall be capable of inserting and
22

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

removing words from the (FC) data passing through it. In the context of jitter methodology, a
retimer resets the accumulation of jitter such that the output of a retimer has the jitter budget
of alpha T.
3.1.69 return loss: The ratio (expressed in dB) of incident power to reflected power, when a
component or assembly is introduced into a link or system. May refer to optical power or to
electrical power in a specified frequency range.
3.1.70 RIN12(OMA): Relative Intensity Noise. Laser noise in dB/Hz with 12 dB optical return loss,
with respect to the optical modulation amplitude.
3.1.71 run length: Number of consecutive identical bits in the transmitted signal e.g., the pattern
0011111010 has a run length of five (5).
3.1.72 running disparity: A binary parameter indicating the cumulative Disparity (positive or
negative) of all previously issued Transmission Characters.
3.1.73 Special Character: Any Transmission Character considered valid by the Transmission
Code but not equated to a Valid Data Byte. Special Characters are provided by the
Transmission Code for use in denoting special functions.
3.1.74 spectral width (RMS): The weighted root mean square width of the optical spectrum. See
FOTP-127.
3.1.75 synchronization: Receiver identification of a Transmission-Word boundary.
3.1.76 TNC: Acronym for a Threaded-Neil-Councilman coaxial cable connector. Specifications for
TNC style connectors are defined in MIL-C-39012 and MIL-C-23329.
3.1.77 transceiver: A transmitter and receiver combined in one package
3.1.78 Transmission Character: Any encoded character (valid or invalid) transmitted across a
physical interface specified by FC-PI. Valid Transmission Characters are specified by the
Transmission Code and include Data and Special Characters.
3.1.79 Transmission Code: A means of Encoding data to enhance its Transmission
Characteristics. The Transmission Code specified by FC-FS is byte-oriented, with (1) Valid
Data Bytes and (2) Special Codes encoded into 10-bit Transmission Characters.
3.1.80 transmitter: In FC-PI context, an Electronic circuit (Tx) that converts an electrical logic
signal to a signal suitable for the communications media (optical or electrical).
3.1.81 TxRx connection: The complete signal path between a transmitter in one FC device and a
receiver in another FC device. See also Link.
3.1.82 TxRx connection segment: That portion of a TxRx connection delimited by separable
connectors or changes in media.
3.1.83 Unit Interval: The period of a nominal bit for a given signaling speed. It is equivalent to the
shortest nominal time between signal transitions. UI is the reciprocal of Baud (Units of UI are
seconds)
3.1.84 Upper Level Protocol (ULP): The protocol user of FC-4 (see clause 3).
3.1.85 word: A string of four contiguous bytes occurring on boundaries that are zero modulo 4 from
a specified reference.
3.2

Editorial conventions

In this International Standard, a number of conditions, mechanisms, parameters, events, states, or


similar terms are printed with the first letter of each word in upper-case and the rest lower-case (e.g.
TxRx connection). Any lower case uses of these words have the normal technical English meanings.
23

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

Numbered items in this International Standard do not represent any priority. Any priority is explicitly
indicated.
In case of any conflict between figure, table, and text, the text takes precedence. Exceptions to this
convention are indicated in the appropriate sections.
In all of the figures, tables, and text of this document, the most significant bit of a binary quantity is
shown on the left side. Exceptions to this convention are indicated in the appropriate sections.
The term "shall" is used to indicate a mandatory rule. If such a rule is not followed, the results are
unpredictable unless indicated otherwise.
In the various ladder diagrams that show a sequence of events, the vertical axis (i.e., up and down
the page) shows time from top to bottom.
The ISO convention of numbering is used, i.e. the ten-thousands and higher multiples are separated
by a space. A comma is used as the decimal point. A comparison of the American and ISO
conventions are shown below:
Table 1 ISO convention
ISO
0,6
2 048
10 000
1 323 462,9

3.2.1

American
0.6
2048
10,000
1,323,462.9

Abbreviations, acronyms, and symbols

Abbreviations, acronyms and symbols applicable to this International Standard are listed. Definitions
of several of these items are included in 3.1. The index at the back of the document is an aid to help
locate these terms in the body of the document.
3.2.2

Data rate abbreviations

The exact data rates are used in the tables and the abbreviated forms are used in text. Note that
2,125 Gigabaud is the preferred ISO method and is used instead of 2 125 megabaud where it makes
sense to do so.
Table 2 Data rate abbreviations

3.2.3

Abbreviation

Abbreviation (FC-PH style)

True signaling rate

1,06 GBd

1 063 MBd

1 062,5 MBd

2,12 GBd

2 125 MBd

2 125 MBd

4,25 GBd

4 250 MBd

4 250 MBd

Synonyms

There are no synonyms in FC-PI.

24

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

3.2.4 Acronyms and other abbreviations


Table 3 Acronyms and other abbreviations
Bd
BER
BNC
CCITT
dB
dBm
DJ
DUT
ECL
EIA
EMC
EMI
FC
FOTP
FWHM
GBd
hex
IEEE
ITU-TS
LOS
LW
MB
MBd
MPN
MM
NA
N_Port
OFC
OFSTP
ORL
ppm
RFI
RIN
RJ
RMS
Rx
SD
SERDES
SM
S/N or
SNR
STP
SW
TDR
TIA
TNC
TP
Tx
TxRx
UI
ULP

baud
bit error rate
Bayonet-Neil-Councilman (coaxial connector)
Comite Consultatif International Telegraphique et Telephonique (see ITV-TS)
decibel
decibel (relative to 1 mW)
deterministic jitter
device under test
Emitter Coupled Logic
Electronic Industries Association
Electromagnetic compatibility
Electromagnetic Interference
Fibre Channel
fiber optic test procedure
full width half maximum
gigabaud
hexadecimal notation
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
The International Union Telecommunication Standardization (formerly CCITT)
loss of signal
long wavelength
megabyte = 106 bytes
megabaud
mode partition noise
multimode
not applicable
Node_Port
open fiber control
optical fiber system test practice
optical return loss
parts per million
radio frequency interference
relative intensity noise
random jitter
root mean square
receiver
Signal Detect
Serializer/Deserializer
single mode
signal-to-noise ratio
shielded twisted pair
short wavelength
time domain reflectometry
Telecommunication Industries Association
Threaded-Neil-Councilman (coaxial connector)
twisted pair
transmitter
a combination of transmitter and receiver
unit interval = 1 bit period
Upper Level Protocol

25

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

3.3

Symbols

Unless indicated otherwise, the following symbols have the listed meanings.
Table 4 Symbols

ohm
micro (e.g., m = micrometer)
wavelength (in vacuo)
chassis or earth ground
signal reference ground

26

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

Structure and Concepts

This clause provides an overview of the structure, concepts and mechanisms used in FC-PI and is
intended for informational purposes only.
The Fibre Channel (FC) is logically a bi-directional point-to-point serial data channel, structured for
high performance information transport. Physically, Fibre Channel is an interconnection of one or
more point-to-point links. Each link end terminates in a Port. Ports are fully specified in FC-PH and
FC-FS. fiber is a general term used to cover all physical media supported by Fibre Channel including
optical fiber, twisted pair, and coaxial cable.
Fibre Channel is structured as a set of hierarchical functions as illustrated in figure 1. Fibre Channel
consists of related functions FC-0 through FC-3. Each of these functions is described as a level.
Fibre Channel does not restrict implementations to specific interfaces between these levels.

ULPs
FC-4
Mapping

FC-3
FC-2
Protocol
FC-1
Code

IPI3

IPI3

SCSI

SCSI

Huntgroup

IP

HIPPI

SBCCS

IP

Others

SBCCS

Others

Common Services

Link Services

Signaling Protocol

Transmission Protocol
FC-FS and FC-PI

FC-0
Physical

Interface (Transmitters and Receivers)


(clauses 6,7,9)
Media
(clauses 8,10)
Figure 1 Fibre channel structure

The Physical interface (FC-0), specified in FC-PH and FC-PI, consists of transmission media,
transmitters, receivers and their interfaces. The Physical interface specifies a variety of media, and
associated drivers and receivers capable of operating at various speeds.
The Transmission protocol (FC-1), Signaling protocol (FC-2) and Common Services (FC-3) are fully
specified in FC-PH and FC-FS. Fibre Channel levels FC-1 through FC-3 specify the rules and
provides mechanisms needed to transfer blocks of information end-to-end, traversing one or more
links.
FC-PH and FC-FS define a suite of functions and facilities available for use by a Upper Level
Protocols (ULP) Mapping protocol (FC-4). This suite of functions and facilities may exceed the
requirements of any one FC-4. An FC-4 may choose only a subset of FC-PH and FC-FS functions
and facilities. Fibre Channel provides a method for supporting a number of ULPs. The Link Services
represent a mandatory function required by FC-PH and FC-FS.

27

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

A Fibre Channel Node is functionally configured as illustrated in figure 2. A Node may support one or
more N_Ports and one or more FC-4s. Each N_Port contains FC-0, FC-1 and FC-2 functions. FC-3
optionally provides the common services to multiple N_Ports and FC-4s.

ULP

ULP

ULP

Node
FC-4

FC-4

FC-4

FC-3
N_Port

N_Port

N_Port

FC-2

FC-2

FC-2

FC-1

FC-1

FC-1

FC-0

FC-0

FC-0

Figure 2 Node functional configuration


4.1

FC-0 general description

The FC-0 level of FC-PH and FC-PI describes the Fibre Channel link. The FC-0 level covers a variety
of media and the associated drivers and receivers capable of operating at a wide range of speeds.
The FC-0 level is designed for maximum flexibility and allows the use of a large number of
technologies to meet the widest range of system requirements.
Each fiber is attached to a transmitter of a Port at one link end and a receiver of another Port at the
other link end (see figure 3). When a Fabric is present in the configuration, multiple links may be
utilized to attach more than one N_Port to more than one F_Port (see figure 4). Patch panels or
portions of the active Fabric may function as repeaters, concentrators or fiber converters. A path
between two N_Ports may be made up of links of different technologies. For example, the path may
have multimode fiber links attached to end Ports but may have a single-mode link in between as
illustrated in figure 5. In figure 6, a typical Fibre Channel building wiring configuration is shown.

28

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

Port B

Port A
Outbound fiber

Outbound fiber

Tx

Tx
Inbound fiber

Rx

Inbound fiber

Rx

Link

Figure 3 FC-0 Link

Fabric
B

Link

Figure 4 Fabric

MM fiber

Link

SM fiber

Link

MM fiber

Link

Path

Figure 5 FC-0 Path

29

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

3. Floor
FC
FC

2. Floor

FC

1. Floor

FC

Basement

FC

Main Frame

Figure 6 Fibre channel building wiring

4.2

FC-0 interface overview

Recommended inteoperability points for transmitter and receivers are included in figures 11 and 12.
The compliance points , and are for reference only and are implementation dependent.
The nomenclature used by FC-PI to reference various combinations of components is defined in
clause 5 on page 32.
The link distance capabilities specified in FC-PI are based on ensuring interoperability across
multiple vendors supplying the technologies (both transceivers and cable plants) under the tolerance
limits specified in FC-PI. Greater link distances may be obtained by specifically engineering a link
30

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

based on knowledge of the technology characteristics and the conditions under which the link is
installed and operated. However, such link distance extensions are outside the scope of FC-PI.
4.3

Data flow stages

Figure 7 illustrates an example of data flow stages of 32-bit word parallel, 8-bit byte parallel, 10-bit
character parallel, and bit serial streams, and vice versa. This example of transmitter to receiver data
flow is for reference only and is implementation dependent.

Tx Data Byte

Tx Bit

8b

32

Rx Bit or
Re-timed Serial Data or
Re-synchronized Bit

10

Tx Word

Legend:
Tx - transmitter
Tx Word - 32 bit tranmit word
Tx Byte - 8 bit transmit byte
Tx Bit - 1 transmit bit
P - parallel side

10

Tx Data Character

10b

32

Rx

Tx

10b

Rx Data Byte

Bit stream

8b

Rx Data Character

Rx Word

Rx - Receiver
Rx Word - 32 bit receive word
Rx Byte - 8 bit receive byte
Rx Bit
- 1 receiver bit
S - serial side

Figure 7 Data flow stages

31

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

FC-PI functional characteristics

FC-PI describes the physical link, the lowest level, in the Fibre Channel system. It is designed for
flexibility and allows the use of several physical interconnect technologies to meet a wide variety of
system application requirements.
5.1

General characteristics

The FC-FS protocol is defined to operate across connections having a bit error rate (BER) detected
at the receiving node of less than 10-12. It is the combined responsibility of the component suppliers
and the system integrator to ensure that this level of service is provided at every node in a given
Fibre Channel installation.
FC-PI has the following general characteristics.
In the physical media signals a logical "1" shall be represented by the following properties:
1) Optical - the state with the higher optical power
2) Unbalanced copper - the state where the ungrounded conductor is more positive than the
grounded conductor
3) Balanced copper - the state where the conductor identified as "+" is more positive than the
conductor identified as "-"
Serial data streams are supported at data rates of 2,12 GBaud, and 4,25 GBaud in addition to the
data rate of 1,06 GBaud. All data rates have transmitter and receiver clock tolerances of 100 ppm.
A link bit error rate (BER) of =10-12as measured at the receiver to which the frame is addressed is
supported. The basis for the BER is the encoded serial data stream on the transmission medium
during system operation.
FC-PI defines eight different specific physical locations in the FC system that include six
interoperability points and two reference points. No interoperability points are required for closed or
integrated links and FC-PI is not required for such applications. For closed or integrated links the
system designer shall ensure that the end to end BER required by FC-FS is delivered.
The requirements specified in FC-PI shall be satisfied at separable connectors where interoperability
and component level interchangeability within the link are expected. A compliant point is a physical
position where the specification requirements are met. For purposes of this document the terms
"compliance point" and "interoperability point" are equivalent. The specified interoperability points
are defined at separable connectors as these are the points where different components can easily
be added, changed, or removed. The reference points are at the chip pads of the FC-0 device.
There is no maximum number of interoperability points between the initiating FC device and the
addressed FC device as long as (1) the requirements at the interoperability points are satisfied for the
respective type of interoperability point and (2) the end to end signal properties are maintained under
the most extreme allowed conditions in the system. The description and physical location of the
specified interoperability points and reference points are detailed in Clause 5.8 Interoperability
points on page 36.
It is the combined responsibility of the component (the separable hardware containing the connector
portion associated with an interoperability point) supplier and the system integrator to ensure that
intended interoperability points are identified to the users of the components and system. This is
required because not all connectors in a link are interoperability points and similar connectors and
connector positions in different applications may not satisfy the FC-PI requirements.
The requirements in this document apply with the system fully active including duplex traffic on all
ports and under all applicable environmental conditions.

32

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

The interface to FC-FS occurs at the logical encoded data interfaces. As these are logical data
constructs no physical implementation is implied by FC-FS. FC-PI is written assuming that the same
single serial data stream exists throughout the link as viewed from the interoperability points. Other
possible schemes for transmitting data, for example using parallel paths, are not defined in FC-PI but
could occur at intermediate places between interoperability points.
Physical links have the following general requirements:
a) Physical point-to-point data links -- no multidrop attachments along the serial path.
b) Every signal shall meet the timing and amplitude requirements associated with its
interoperability point under the most extreme specified conditions of system noise and input
signal degradation.
c) All users are cautioned that detailed specifications shall take into account end-of-life worst case
values (e.g., manufacturing, temperature, power supply).
The interface between FC-PI and FC-FS is intentionally structured to be technology and
implementation independent. That is, the same set of commands and services may be used for all
signal sources and communication schemes applicable to the technology of a particular
implementation. As a result of this, all safety or other operational considerations which may be
required for a specific communications technology are to be handled by the FC-PI clauses
associated with that technology. An example of this would be ensuring that optical power levels
associated with eye safety are maintained.
5.2

FC-PI States

5.2.1 Transmitter FC-PI (FC-0) States


The transmitter is controlled by the FC-FS level. Its function is to convert the serial data received from
the FC-FS level into the proper signal types associated with the transmission media.
The transmitter has the following states:
a) Transmitter Not-Enabled State: A not-enabled state is defined as optical output off for optical
transmitters. Electrical transmitters in the not-enabled state shall not launch dynamic voltages
exceeding the limits specified as Transmitter off voltage in table 27 on page 72. A transmitter
shall be in the not-enabled state at the completion of its power on sequence unless the
transmitter is specifically directed otherwise by the FC-FS level.
b) Transmitter Enabled State: The transmitter is in an enabled state when the transmitter is
capable of operation within its specifications while sending valid bit sequences.
c) Transmitter Failure State: Some types of transmitters are capable of monitoring themselves
for internal failures. Examples are laser transmitters where the monitor diode current may be
compared against a reference to determine a proper operating point. Other transmitters, such
as Light Emitting Diodes and electrical transmitters do not typically have this capability. If the
transmitter is capable of performing this monitoring function then detection of a failure shall
cause entry into the transmitter failure state.
The transition between the Transmitter Not-Enabled and Transmitter Enabled states is also
described.
a) Transition between Transmitter Not-Enabled and Transmitter Enabled States: The
sequence of events required for the transition between the transmitter not-enabled and the
transmitter enabled states are media dependant both as to the time period required and the
optical or electrical activity on the media interface.

33

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

5.2.2

Receiver States

The function of the receiver is to convert the incoming data from the form required by the
communications media employed, retime the data, and present the data and an associated clock to
the FC-FS level. The receiver has no states.
5.3

Response to input data phase jumps

Some link_control_facilities may detect phase discontinuities in the incoming serial data stream. This
may occur for example from the operation of an asynchronous serial switch at the transmitter. In the
event of a phase discontinuity, the recovery characteristics of the receiver shall be as follows:
a) Phase jump - Uniform distribution between 180.
b) Link - Worst case
c) Degree of recovery - Within BER objective (10-12)
d) Probability of recovery - 95%
e) Recovery time - 2500 bit intervals from last phase jump
Additional wait time before next phase jump

None

The FC-0 level shall require no intervention from higher levels to perform this recovery. If, at the end
of the specified time, the higher levels determine that bit synchronization is not present these levels
may assume a fault has occurred and take appropriate action.
5.4

Limitations on invalid code

FC-0 does not detect transmit code violations, invalid ordered sets, or any other alterations of the
encoded bit stream. However, it is recognized that individual implementations may wish to transmit
such invalid bit streams to provide diagnostic capability at the higher levels. Any transmission
violation, such as invalid ordered sets, which follow valid character encoding rules shall be
transparent to FC-0. Invalid character encoding could possibly cause a degradation in receiver
sensitivity and increased jitter resulting in increased BER or loss of bit synchronization.
During testing the FC-0 layer should remain synchronized and meet BER requirements if the
transmitted bit stream meets the following requirements. The code balance in any 10 bits is in the
range 40% to 60%. For example the pattern "1010110101" has 6 1s in a total of 10 bits yielding a
code balance of 6/10 = 60%. The maximum run length is limited to 12 in 20 bits, for example 00111
11111 11110 01100 has a run length of 12. A run length of 12 in 20 consecutive bits shall occur not
more than once in any contiguous set of 320 bits. The other 300 bits shall have a code balance
between 49,5% and 50,5%. and the run length shall be limited to 5 bits.
5.5

Receiver initialization time

The time interval required by the receiver from the initial receipt of a valid input to the time that the
receiver is synchronized to the bit stream and delivering valid retimed data within the BER
requirement, shall not exceed 1 ms. Should the retiming function be implemented in a manner that
requires direction from a higher level to start the initialization process, the time interval shall start at
the receipt of the initialization request.
5.6

Loss of signal (Rx_LOS) function

The FC-0 may optionally have a loss of signal function. This function is logically inverted from the
signal detect function in FC-PH. If implemented, this function shall indicate when a signal is absent at
the input to the receiver. The activation level shall lie in a range whose upper bound is the minimum
34

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

specified sensitivity of the receiver and whose lower bound is defined by a complete removal of the
input connector. While there is no defined hysteresis for this function there shall be a single transition
between output logic states for any monotonic increase or decrease in the input signal power
occurring within the reaction time of the signal detect circuitry. The reaction time to the input signal is
defined in annex E.
5.7

FC-PI nomenclature

The nomenclature for the technology options are illustrated in figure 8.

100-SM-LC-L
SPEED
400 400 MB/s
200 200 MB/s
100 100 MB/s
MEDIA
SM singlemode
M5 multimode 50 m
M6 multimode 62.5 m
SE unbalanced copper
DF balanced copper
TRANSMITTER
LC long wave laser cost reduced (1300 nm)
SN short wave laser (850 nm)
EL electrical
LL long wave laser (1550 nm)*
DISTANCE
L long distance (2m to 10km)
I Intermediate distance (2m to 2km)
S short distance (<100m)
V very long distance (2m to >50km)*

* not specified in FC-PI


Figure 8 FC variant nomenclature

35

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

5.8

Interoperability points

Figure 9 shows the physical location of the six different types of interoperability points defined in FCPI.

ENCLOSURE
Optional components not
specified in this standard

Internal FC Device
R R

SERDES

R
T

R R

SERDES

Internal FC Device
R R

SERDES

T
R

SERDES

Internal
TxRx Connection
segments of interenclosure
TxRx Connections
(shielding optional)
Intra-enclosure
TxRx Connections
(shielding optional)
R

R
T

GBIC
T

External
TxRx Connection segments
of inter-enclosure
TxRx Connections
(shielding mandatory)

R
T

Required active circuit

Figure 9 Example of physical location of reference and interoperability points

36

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

T= Component Transmitter Pin


T = Bulkhead Transmitter Connector

Component Receiver Pin = R


Device Receiver Connector = R
Bulkhead Receiver Connector = R
STORAGE
SYSTEM

SYSTEM
HOST ADAPTER

DISK DRIVE

SERDES

SERDES

R = Bulkhead Receiver Connector


R= Component Receiver Pin

Bulkhead Transmitter Connector = T


Device Transmitter Connector = T
Component Transmitter Pin = T

Without use of Internal =Connector

T = Component Transmitter Pin


T = Internal PMD Connector
T = Bulkhead Transmitter Connector

Component Receiver Pin = R


Device Receiver Connector = R
Internal PMD Connector = R
Bulkhead Receiver Connector = R
STORAGE
SYSTEM
DISK DRIVE

SYSTEM
HOST ADAPTER
RT = Retimer
Tx
Rx

Jitter Source
Examples are:

R = Bulkhead Receiver Connector


R = Internal PMD Connector
R= Component Receiver Pin

RT

Rx

RT

Tx

BACKPANEL
PCBs
CABLES
CONNECTORS

Bulkhead Transmitter Connector = T


Internal PMD Connector = T
Device Transmitter Connector = T
Component Transmitter Pin = T

Use of Internal Connector and Retimer


Note: is a reference point, not an interoperability point
Figure 10 Use of Internal Connector and Retimer

37

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

Enclosure wall
(Faraday shield)

T
TX

T(Op or Cu)

TX

Passive
* Elements

GBIC
Optical TRX

TX

Active
Elements

GBIC
Optical TRX

TX
TX

TX

*
*

T
MIA

T
GBIC

Active CU

Active
Elements

* When no active circuit exists between alpha and delta or between alpha and gamma
larger minimum launch amplitudes are required at the alpha point than when there is an
active circuit. Configurations with beta points require active circuits between beta
and delta or, if no delta point exists, between beta and gamma.

Figure 11 Media interchange component TX interoperability point examples

38

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

Enclosure wall
(Faraday shield)

R(Op or Cu)

RX

RX

R
GBIC
Optical TRX

Passive
Elements

GBIC
Optical TRX

Active
Elements

R
MIA

RX
R

R
GBIC

Active CU
Active
Elements

RX

RX

RX

* When no active circuit exists between delta and alpha or between gamma and alpha
larger minimum launch amplitudes are required at the gamma or delta point than when there
is an active circuit. Configurations with beta points require active circuits between beta
and delta or, if no delta point exists, between beta and gamma.

Figure 12 Media interchange component RX interoperability point examples

39

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

Disk Farm

Retiming Hub
R

R R
T

R
T

Server
R

T
T
R

Fabric

R R
T

R R
T

Retiming Element
T

Reference point

Active Bypass Circuit


Separable
connector

GBIC

Interoperability
Points

Fixed TRX

Figure 13 Hub interoperability point example

40

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

Fabric

Reference point

GBIC
T

MIA

R R

Fabric
Server

Active circuits
T

Disk Farm

R
R

Interoperability
Points

MIA
T

GBIC

GBIC
T

R R

R
R

Figure 14 Examples of interoperability points


The alpha points are at the pads of the package containing the chip that contains the serial
transmitter or receiver. The beta points are at the downstream side of the separable connectors
nearest the SERDES. The delta points are at the downstream side of the separable connector
inside the enclosure nearest the gamma points. The gamma points are at the downstream side of
the external connector on the enclosure. The enclosure is the EMC shielded boundary (Faraday
shield) for the components.
The signal requirements at each interoperability point are specified in the sections of this document
that define the requirements for the variant.
The connections shown in figure 9 are examples only. Many other configurations are also possible.
For example one could have direct alpha to alpha connections. Additional circuitry may be required
between the beta and Delta points to achieve the required specifications. Multiple Gamma points
may exist in the same link.
Interoperability at the points defined requires satisfying both the specified physical location and the
specified signal requirements. If either are missing then the interface becomes a non-interoperable
interface for that point in the link only -- the link could still satisfy the requirements for end to end
operation even if intermediate points do not meet the interoperability requirements. Durable
identification is required for all points in the link that are expected to be interoperability points (in user
documentation for example)

41

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

Figure 15 shows an overview of the intra- and inter- enclosures enviroments with all possible link
configurations identified.

INTER ENCLOSURE
ENVIRONMENT

INTRA ENCLOSURE
ENVIRONMENT

INTRA ENCLOSURE
ENVIRONMENT

POSSIBLE LINK CONFIGURATIONS:

POSSIBLE LINK CONFIGURATIONS:


ALPHA* - ALPHA*
ALPHA* BETA ALPHA*
ALPHA* - BETA - BETA-ALPHA*

POSSIBLE LINK CONFIGURATIONS:

ALPHA GAMMA GAMMA ALPHA


ALPHA GAMMA GAMMA DELTA ALPHA
** ALPHA GAMMA GAMMA DELTA BETA ALPHA*
ALPHA DELTA GAMMA GAMMA ALPHA
ALPHA DELTA GAMMA GAMMA DELTA ALPHA
** ALPHA DELTA GAMMA GAMMA BETA ALPHA*
** ALPHA* BETA GAMMA GAMMA ALPHA
** ALPHA* BETA GAMMA GAMMA DELTA ALPHA
** ALPHA* BETA GAMMA GAMMA BETA ALPHA*
** ALPHA* BETA DELTA GAMMA GAMMA ALPHA
** ALPHA* BETA DELTA GAMMA GAMMA DELTA ALPHA
** ALPHA* BETA DELTA GAMMA GAMMA BETA ALPHA*
** ALPHA* BETA DELTA GAMMA GAMMA DELTA BETA ALPHA*

ALPHA* - ALPHA*
ALPHA*BETA ALPHA*
ALPHA* - BETA - BETA-ALPHA*

ENCLOSURE BOUNDARY
** SIGNAL RECONDITIONING CIRCUITS ARE
REQUIRED IN THE ENCLOSURE WHEN THE ENCLOSURE INCLUDES
BOTH BETA AND GAMMA POINTS IN THE SAME LINK -THIS PRESERVES INDEPENDENT AMPLITUDE
BUDGETS FOR BOTH INTRA AND INTER ENVIRONMENTS
SAME FOR JITTER AT DOUBLE SPEED ONLY

* THE JITTER SPECIFICATION FOR ALPHA POINTS ASSOCIATED WITH BETA POINTS OR INTRA ENCLOSURE
ALPHA TO-ALPHA CONFIGURATIONS IS DIFFERENT FROM THE JITTER SPECIFICATION FOR ALPHA POINTS
ASSOCIATED WITH DELTA OR GAMMA POINTS -- ALPHA AMPLITUDE REQUIREMENTS ARE NOT SPECIFIED
ALPHA POINTS ONLY EXIST WITHIN ENCLOSURES

Figure 15 Overview of the signal specification architecture


5.9

FC-PI technology options

FC-PI provides for a variety of technology options table 5 lists variants by name and FC-PI
nomenclature, a reference to the clause containing the detailed requirements, and some key
parameters that characterize the variant. Alternate cable plants, if any, are also noted.
Table 5 FC-PI technology options
100

SM

100-SM-LC-L
Subclause 6.1
SM
1300nm
2m-10km

200
200-SM-LC-L
Subclause 6.1
SM
1300nm
2m-10km

400
400-SM-LC-L
Subclause 6.1
SM
1300 nm
2m-10 km

42

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

Table 5 FC-PI technology options


100

MM 50

MM 62.5

100-M5-SN-I
Subclause 6.2
MM
780/850nm
2m-500m
100-M6-SN-I
Subclause 6.2
MM
780/850nm
2m-300m

200

400

200-M5-SN-I
Subclause 6.2
MM
850 nm
2m-300m

400-M5-SN-I
Subclause 6.2
MM
850nm
2m-150 m

200-M6-SN-I
Subclause 6.2
MM
850 nm
2m-150m

400-M6-SN-I
Subclause 6.2
MM
850nm
2m-70 m

200-SE-EL-S
100-SE-EL-S
Clause 9
Clause 9
Length depends Length depends
EL Unbalanced
on unbalanced on unbalanced
media
media

EL Balanced

200-DF-EL-S
100-DF-EL-S
Clause 9
Clause 9
Length depends Length depends
on balanced
on balanced
media
media

Editors Note: need to create and add this jitter table/figure and note the internal and external environments

The lengths specified in table 5 are the minimum lengths supported with transmitters, media, and
receivers all simultaneously operating under the most degraded conditions allowed. Longer lengths
may be achieved by restricting parameters in the transmitter, media, or receiver. If such restrictions
are used on the link components then interoperability at interoperability points within the link and
component level interchangeability within the link is no longer supported

43

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

44

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

Optical interface specification

This clause defines the optical signal characteristics at the interface connector receptacle. Each
conforming optical FC attachment shall be compatible with this optical interface to allow
interoperability within an FC environment. Fibre Channel links shall not exceed the BER objective
(10 -12 ) under any conditions. The parameters specified in this clause support meeting that
requirement under all conditions including the minimum input power level. The corresponding cable
plant specifications are described in clause 8 Optical fiber cable plant specification on page 67.
Notes: Laser safety issues
1

The optical output shall not exceed the Class 1 maximum permissible exposure limits under any conditions
of operation, including open transmitter bore, open fiber and reasonable single fault conditions per EN
60825-1 and CDRH 1040.10 regulations 21CFR chapter I sub chapter J.

All laser safety standards and regulations require that the manufacturer of a laser product provide
information about a products laser, safety features, labeling, use, maintenance and service.

6.1

SM data links

Table 6 gives the link budgets for 10 km single-mode optical fiber links running at 1,06 GBd,
2,12 GBd and 4,25 GBd. The optical power coupled into the fiber shall be limited to a maximum
value with Class 1 laser safety operation in accordance with CDRH and EN 60825-1
6.1.1 SM optical output interface
The general laser transmitter pulse shape characteristics are specified in the form of a mask of the
transmitter eye diagram at point T (see clause 5.8 on page 36). These characteristics include rise
time, fall time, pulse overshoot, pulse undershoot, and ringing, all of which shall be controlled to
prevent excessive degradation of the receiver sensitivity. For the purpose of an assessment of the
transmit signal, it is important to consider not only the eye opening, but also the overshoot and
undershoot limitations. The parameters specifying the mask of the transmitter eye diagram are
shown in figure 16.
1+Y2
1

Normalized Amplitude

1-Y1
0.5
Y1
0
-Y2
0

x1

x2

1-x2

1-x1

Normalized Time (in UI)


NOTE X1 shall be half the value given for total jitter at the gamma
T point given in table 9 for SM and table 13 for MM

Figure 16 Transmitter eye diagram mask


45

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

Table 6 Singlemode link classes


FC-0
Subclause
Data rate
Nominal signaling rate
Rate tolerance
Operating distance
Fiber mode-field (core) diameter
Transmitter (gamma-T)
Type
Spectral center wavelength, min.
Spectral center wavelength, max.
RMS spectral width, max.
Average launched power, max.
Average launched power, min.
Optical modulation amplitude, min.
Rise/Fall time (20% - 80%), max.
RIN12 (OMA), max.
Receiver (gamma- R)
Average received power, max.
Optical modulation amplitude, min.
Return loss of receiver, min.
Receiver electrical 3 dB upper cutoff
frequency, max
Receiver electrical 10 dB upper cutoff
frequency, max

Unit
MB/s
ppm
ppm
m
m

nm
nm
nm
dBm
dBm
mW
ps

100-SM-LC-L 200-SM-LC-L 400-SM-LC-L Note


100
1 062,5
+100
2 - 10 000
9

200
2 125
+100
2 - 10 000
9

400
4 250
+100
2 - 10 000
9

Laser

Laser

Laser

-3
-9.5

-3
-11.7

-1
-8.4

320

160

80

1
1
1
2
3
1,4
5

-116

-117

-118

dBm
mW
dB

-3
0.015 5
12

-3
0.015
12

-1
0.029
12

GHz

1.5

2.5

5.0

GHz

12

dB/Hz

Notes:
1

Tradeoffs are available between spectral center wavelength, RMS spectral width, and minimum
optical modulation amplitude. See figure 18 to figure 20

Must be consistent with CDRH class 1 laser standards and EN 60825......

In some cases, the OMA requirement implicitly places a stricter lower bound on average
launched power.

Optical modulation amplitude values are peak-to-peak. See annex A.5

Optical rise and fall time specifications are based on the unfiltered waveforms. For the purpose of
standardizing the measurement method, measured waveforms shall conform to the mask as
defined in FC-PI figure 16: Transmitter eye diagram mask. The filter response effect should be
removed from the measured rise and fall times using the equation:
TRISE/FALL = [(TRISE/FALL_MEASURED)2 (TRISE/FALL_FILTER)2]1/2
The optical signal may have different rise and fall times. Any filter should have an impulse
response equivalent to a fourth order Bessel-Thomson Filter.

See annex A.4.

See annex A

46

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

The mask of the eye diagram for the laser transmitters shall be measured using a receiver with a
fourth-order Bessel-Thompson transfer function given by:

105
H P = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------2
3
4
105 + 105y + 45y + 10y + y
With

y = 2.114p

j
p = -----r

r = 2f r

f r = 0, 75 X Bit rate

NOTE This filter is not intended to represent the noise filter used within an optical receiver but it is intended
to provide a uniform measurement condition.

The nominal attenuation at the reference frequency, fr, is 3 dB. The corresponding attenuation and
group delay distortion at various frequencies is given in table 7.
Table 7 Transmit pulse noise filter
f/f0

f/fr

0,15
0,3
0,45
0,6
0,75
0,9
1,0
1,05
1,2
1,35
1,5
2,0

0,2
0,4
0,6
0,8
1,0
1,2
1,33
1,4
1,6
1,8
2,0
2,67

Attenuation
(dB)
0,1
0,4
1,0
1,9
3,0
4,5
5,7
6,4
8,5
10,9
13,4
21,5

Distortion
(UI)
0
0
0
0,002
0,008
0,025
0,044
0,055
0,10
0,14
0,19
0,30

Table 8 Tx Pulse Noise Filter Attenuation Tolerance


Reference Frequency

Attenuation Tolerance

f/fr

a (dB)

0,1 - 1.00
1,00 2,00

+ 0,5
+0,5 +3,0

NOTE Intermediate values of a are to be linearly interpolated on a logarithmic


frequency scale.

The mask of the eye diagram is intended to define the limits of overshoot, undershoot, and ringing of
the transmitted optical signal. The eye mask diagram is not to be used for determining compliance
with the specifications for rise/fall time and jitter.
Optical modulation amplitude is defined as the difference in optical power between a logic-1 and a
logic-0. For more information on testing OMA see annex A.5
The optical power measurement shall be made by the methods of OFSTP-2. The measurement may
be made with the node transmitting an idle sequence or other valid Fibre Channel traffic.

47

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

6.1.2

SM optical input interface

The receiver shall operate within the BER objective (10-12) over the link's lifetime and temperature
range when the input power falls in the range given in table 6 and when driven by a data stream
output that fits the specified eye diagram mask through a cable plant as specified in clause 8. The
measurement shall be made by the methods of OFSTP-3.
6.1.3

SM jitter budget

This clause defines, for every compliance point, the allowable jitter (see table 9, Jitter Output) and the
jitter which shall be tolerated (see table 10)
Receiver TJ and DJ must comply to the listed values in table 9, over all allowable optical power input
ranges and extinction ratios, as listed in table 6. Receiver test conditions should not incur the
penalties that are already built into the link power budget.

Table 9 SM jitter output, pk-pk, max


T

UI

0,10

0,11

0,12

UI

0,21

0,23

0,25

Units
Deterministic
(DJ)
Total (TJ)1

100-SM-LC-L
T
T

0,21

0,23

0,36

0,37

0,38

0,43

0,47

0,61

0,63

0,65

200-SM-LC-L and 400-SM-LC-L


T
T
R

Deterministic
(DJ)

UI

0,13

0,14

0,26

Total (TJ)1

UI

0,25

0,26

0,44

0,28

0,39

0,40

0,48

0,64

0,65

Notes:
1 Total jitter is the sum of deterministic jitter and random jitter. If the actual deterministic jitter is less than
the maximum specified, then the random jitter may increase as long as the total jitter does not exceed
the specified maximum total jitter.
2
3

Total jitter is specified at the 10-12 probability.


The deterministic and total values in this table apply to jitter after application of a single pole high-pass
frequency-weighting function, which progressively attenuates jitter at 20 dB/decade below a frequency
of bit rate/1667.

48

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

Table 10 SM jitter tolerance, pk-pk, min.

Sinusoidal swept freq.(SJ)


637 KHz 4 to > 5 MHz
Deterministic (DJ)
637 KHz-531 MHz
Total (TJ)2,3

100-SM-LC-L
T
T

0,10

0,10

0,10

0,10

0,10

0,10

0,11

0,12

0,21

0,23

0,36

0,37

0,38

0,28

0,30

0,48

0,52

0,66

0,68

0,70

Unit

UI

NA

0,10

UI

NA

UI

NA

200-SM-LC-L and 400-SM-LC-L


T
T
Unit T
Sinusoidal swept freq.(SJ)
637 KHz 4 to > 5 MHz
Deterministic (DJ)
637 KHz-531 MHz
Total (TJ)2,3

UI

NA

0,10

0,10

0,10

0,10

0,10

UI

NA

0,14

0,26

0,28

0,39

0,40

UI

NA

0,31

0,49

0,53

0,69

0,70

Peak - peak amplitude (UI)

Notes:
1 For singlemode TxRx Connections the compliance point is R. Values given at other points
are advisory only.
2 The jitter values given are normative for a combination of DJ, RJ, and SJ which receivers
shall be able to tolerate without exceeding a BER of 10-12.
3 No value is given for random jitter (RJ). For compliance with this spec, the actual random
jitter amplitude shall be the value that brings total jitter to the stated value at a probability of
10-12.
4 Receivers shall tolerate sinusoidal jitter of progressively greater amplitude at lower
frequencies, according to the mask in figure 16, combined with the same DJ and RJ levels as
were used in the high frequency sweep

1,5

FC = nominal baud frequency.


Frequencies in parenthesis are
for FC = 1062,5 MBd.

0,1
FC / 1667
(637 KHz.)
Sinusoidal jitter frequency (log/log plot)

FC / 25 000

Figure 17 Sinusoidal jitter mask


49

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

6.1.4 SM tradeoffs
In order to meet the link power budget the transmitter can trade off OMA, spectral width and center
wavelength as shown in the following figures.

100-S M-LC-L
7
Min Tx OMA =0.246mW
Min Tx OMA =0.219mW

Maximum Spectral Width (nm)

Min Tx OMA =0.195mW


Min Tx OMA =0.174mW

5
4

3
2
1
0
1.265

1.285

1.305

1.325

1.345

1.365

C enter W aveleng th (um )

Figure 18 1.06GBd SM 10km link

50

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

200-SM-LL-L

Maximum Spectral Width (nm)

7
Min Tx OMA =0.213mW
Min Tx OMA =0.189mW
Min Tx OMA =0.169mW
Min Tx OMA =0.150mW
Min Tx OMA =0.134mW

6
5
4
3
2
1
0
1.265

1.285

1.305

1.325

1.345

1.365

Center W av elength (um )


Figure 19 2.12GBd SM 10km link

400-S M-LL-L

Maximum Spectral Width (nm)

3 .5
M in
M in
M in
M in

3
2 .5

Tx
Tx
Tx
Tx

O M A =0 .4 0 9 m W
O M A =0 .3 6 5 m W
O M A =0 .3 2 5 m W
O M A =0 .2 9 0 m W

2
1 .5
1
0 .5
0
1 .2 6 5

1 .2 8 5

1 .3 0 5

1 .3 2 5

1 .3 4 5

1 .3 6 5

C e n te r W a v e le n g th (u m )
Figure 20 4.25GBd SM 10km link

51

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

6.2
6.2.1

MM data links
MM short wavelength (SW) data links

The columns in table 11 on page 53 and table 12 on page 54 give the link budget, transmitter
specifications, and receiver specifications for the short wavelength (SW) laser links operating at the
1,06, 2,12, and 4,25GBd rates. The specifications in the tables are intended to allow compliance to
class 1 laser safety.
Reflection effects on the transmitter are assumed to be small but need to be bounded. A
specification of maximum Relative Intensity Noise (RIN) under worst case reflection conditions is
included to ensure that reflections do not impact system performance.
6.2.2

MM optical input interface

The receiver shall operate within a BER of 10-12 over the links lifetime and temperature range when
the input power falls within the range given in table 11 or table 12, and when driven by a data stream
output that fits the specified eye diagram mask through a cable plant as specified in figure 16
Transmitter eye diagram mask on page 45.

52

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

Table 11 Multimode 50 m link classes


FC-0
Subclause
Data rate
Nominal signaling rate
Rate tolerance
Operating distance
Fiber mode-field (core) diameter
Transmitter (gamma-T)
Type
Spectral center wavelength, min.
Spectral center wavelength, max.
RMS spectral width, max.
Average launched power, max.
Average launched power, min.
Optical modulation amplitude, min.
Rise/Fall time (20% - 80%), max.
RIN12 (OMA), max.
Receiver (gamma- R)
Average received power, max.
Optical modulation amplitude, min.
Return loss of receiver, min.
Stressed receiver sensitivity (OMA), min.
Stressed receiver ISI test, min.
Stressed receiver DCD component of DJ
(at TX), min.
Receiver electrical 3 dB upper cutoff
frequency, max
Receiver electrical 10 dB upper cutoff
frequency, max

Unit
MB/s
ppm
ppm
m
m

100-M5-SN-I
6.2
100
1 062,5
+100
2 - 500
50

200-M5-SN-I
6.2
200
2 125
+100
2 - 300
50

400-M5-SN-I
6.2
400
4 250
+100
2 -150
50

Note

nm
nm
nm
dBm
dBm
mW
ps

Laser
770
860
1.0
-5
-10.0
0.156
300

Laser
830
860
0.85
-4
-10.0
0.196
150

Laser
830
860
0.85
-4
-9.0
0.247
90

2
3
4
5

dB/Hz

-116

-117

-118

dBm
mW
dB
mW
dB

0
0.031
12
0.055
0.96

0
0.049
12
0.096
1.26

0
0.061
12
0.138
1.67

ps

80

40

20

GHz

1.5

2.5

5.0

GHz

12

4
4

Notes:
1 The operating ranges and loss budgets shown here are based on MM fiber bandwidth given in
table 25. For other MM fiber bandwidths see Annex D. See annex L for link budget

calculations.
2
3
4
5

6
7

Lesser of class 1 laser safety limits (CDRH and EN 60825) or receiver power, max.
In some cases, the OMA requirement implicitly places a stricter lower bound on average
launched power.
Optical modulation amplitude values are peak-to-peak. See annex A.5
Optical rise and fall time specifications are based on the unfiltered waveforms. For the purpose of
standardizing the measurement method, measured waveforms shall conform to the mask as
defined in FC-PI figure 16: Transmitter eye diagram mask. The filter response effect should be
removed from the measured rise and fall times using the equation:
TRISE/FALL = [(TRISE/FALL_MEASURED)2 (TRISE/FALL_FILTER)2]1/2
The optical signal may have different rise and fall times. Any filter should have an impulse
response equivalent to a fourth order Bessel-Thomson Filter.
See annex A.4.
See annex A.

53

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

Table 12 Multimode 62.5 m link classes


FC-0
Subclause
Data rate
Nominal signaling rate
Rate tolerance
Operating distance
Fiber mode-field (core) diameter
Transmitter (gamma-T)
Type
Spectral center wavelength, min.
Spectral center wavelength, max.
RMS spectral width, max.
Average launched power, max.
Average launched power, min.
Optical modulation amplitude, min.
Rise/Fall time (20% - 80%), max.
RIN12 (OMA), max.
Receiver (gamma- R)
Average received power, max.
Optical modulation amplitude, min.
Return loss of receiver, min.
Stressed receiver sensitivity (OMA), min.
Stressed receiver ISI test, min.
Stressed receiver DCD component of DJ
(at TX), min.
Receiver electrical 3 dB upper cutoff
frequency, max
Receiver electrical 10 dB upper cutoff
frequency, max

Unit
MB/s
ppm
ppm
m
m

100-M6-SN-I
6.2
100
1 062,5
+100
2 - 300
62.5

200-M6-SN-I
6.2
200
2 125
+100
2 - 150
62.5

400-M6-SN-I
6.2
400
4 250
+100
2 -70
62.5

Note

nm
nm
nm
dBm
dBm
mW
ps

Laser
770
860
1.0
-5
-10.0
0.156
300

Laser
830
860
0.85
-4
-10.0
0.196
150

Laser
830
860
0.85
-4
-9.0
0.247
90

2
3
4
5

dB/Hz

-116

-117

-118

dBm
mW
dB
mW
dB

0
0.031
12
0.067
2.18

0
0.049
12
0.109
2.03

0
0.061
12
0.148
2.14

ps

80

40

20

GHz

1.5

2.5

5.0

GHz

12

4
4

Notes:
1 The operating ranges and loss budgets shown here are based on MM fiber bandwidth given in
table 25. For other MM fiber bandwidths see Annex D.
2 Lesser of class 1 laser safety limits (CDRH and EN 60825) or receiver power, max.
3 In some cases, the OMA requirement implicitly places a stricter lower bound on average
launched power.
4 Optical modulation amplitude values are peak-to-peak. See annex A.5
5 Optical rise and fall time specifications are based on the unfiltered waveforms. For the purpose of
standardizing the measurement method, measured waveforms shall conform to the mask as
defined in FC-PI figure 16: Transmitter eye diagram mask. The filter response effect should be
removed from the measured rise and fall times using the equation:
TRISE/FALL = [(TRISE/FALL_MEASURED)2 (TRISE/FALL_FILTER)2]1/2
The optical signal may have different rise and fall times. Any filter should have an impulse
response equivalent to a fourth order Bessel-Thomson Filter.
6 See annex A.4.
7 See annex A.

54

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

6.2.3 MM jitter budget


This clause defines, for every compliance point, the allowable jitter (see table 13, Jitter output) and
the jitter which shall be tolerated (see table 14)
Table 13 MM jitter output, pk-pk, max
Units

100-SM-LC-L
T
T

Deterministic
(DJ)

UI

0,10

0,11

0,12

Total (TJ)1

UI

0,21

0,23

0,25

0,21

0,24

0,36

0,37

0,38

0,43

0,47

0,61

0,63

0,65

200-SM-LC-L and 400-SM-LC-L


T
T
R

Deterministic
(DJ)

UI

0,13

0,14

0,26

0,29

0,39

0,40

Total (TJ)1

UI

0,25

0,26

0,44

0,48

0,64

0,65

Notes:
1 Total jitter is the sum of deterministic jitter and random jitter. If the actual deterministic jitter is less than
the maximum specified, then the random jitter may increase as long as the total jitter does not exceed
the specified maximum total jitter.
2
3

Total jitter is specified at the 10-12 probability.


The deterministic and total values in this table apply to jitter after application of a single pole high-pass
frequency-weighting function, which progressively attenuates jitter at 20 dB/decade below a frequency
of bit rate/1667.

Table 14 MM jitter tolerance, pk-pk, min.

Sinusoidal swept freq.(SJ)


637 KHz 4 to > 5 MHz
Deterministic (DJ)
637 KHz-531 MHz
Total (TJ)2,3

100-SM-LC-L
T
T

Unit

UI

NA

0,10

0,10

0,10

0,10

0,10

0,10

0,10

UI

NA

0,11

0,12

0,21

0,24

0,36

0,37

0,38

UI

NA

0,28

0,30

0,48

0,52

0,66

0,68

0,70

200-SM-LC-L and 400-SM-LC-L


T
T
T

Unit
Sinusoidal swept freq.(SJ)
637 KHz 4 to > 5 MHz
Deterministic (DJ)
637 KHz-531 MHz
Total (TJ)2,3

UI

NA

0,10

0,10

0,10

0,10

0,10

UI

NA

0,14

0,26

0,29

0,39

0,40

UI

NA

0,31

0,49

0,53

0,69

0,70

Notes:
1 For singlemode TxRx Connections the compliance point is R. Values given at other points are advisory
only.
2 The jitter values given are normative for a combination of DJ, RJ, and SJ which receivers shall be able to
tolerate without exceeding a BER of 10-12.
3 No value is given for random jitter (RJ). For compliance with this spec, the actual random jitter amplitude
shall be the value that brings total jitter to the stated value at a probability of 10-12.
4 Receivers shall tolerate sinusoidal jitter of progressively greater amplitude at lower frequencies,
according to the mask in figure 16, combined with the same DJ and RJ levels as were used in the high
frequency sweep

55

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

Receiver TJ and DJ must comply to the listed values in table 13, over all allowable optical power
input ranges and extinction ratios, as listed in table 11 or table 12. Receiver test conditions should not
incur the penalties that are already built into the link power budget.

56

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

Optical interface receptacle specifications

The primary function of the optical interface connector is to align the optical transmission fiber
mechanically to an optical port on a component such as a receiver or a transmitter.
7.1

SC optical interface

The objective of this clause is to specify the connector and interfaces sufficiently to insure the
following:
a) Both Mechanical and Optical Performance
b) Intermatability
c) To allow the maximum supplier flexibility.
Figure 21 shows the SC optical interface plug and receptacle.

Keys

ut
to
h
g
Li

Plug

er
fib
f
o

h
Lig

er
fib
o
t
t in

Re

iv
ce

er
a
Tr

ns

tt
mi

er

Receptacle

Slots for keys


NOTE Connector keys are used for transmit/receive polarity only. The connector
keys do not differentiate between singlemode and multimode connectors.

Figure 21 SC optical connector


7.1.1 Performance requirements
Supporting test paramerers is contained in annex D.
7.1.2 SC optical plug
The Duplex SC Optical Plug shall conform to the requirements of IEC 61754-4
Only the Floating Duplex style Connector Plug shall be used. Rigid SC Duplex connector shall not be
used.
NOTE Floating Duplex SC Connectors essentially take two simplex connectors and mechanically couple
them together so each of the two SC Simplex Connectors are retained but free to 'float' within the

57

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000


constraints of the coupling assembly. Rigid Duplex SC connectors embody a single rigid housing to
retain the simplex connectors and are not supported.

7.1.3

SC Duplex optical receptacle

The active SC Duplex Receptacle Interface shall conform to the requirements of IEC 61754-4-5
Duplex PC Interface with the following exception. The distance between the centre line of the active
optical bores (ref DB) shall be increased from 12.65/12.75mm to 12.60/12.80mm.
NOTE This is to facilitate the use of Floating Duplex SC Plug Connectors (example IEC 60874-19-1) and
avoids the use of restrictive manufacturing tolerances associated with the transceiver. Increasing this
tolerance precludes the use of Rigid Duplex SC connectors.

7.2

SG optical interface

The primary function of the optical interface specification is to define mechanical alignment of the
optical fibers to an optical port on a component such as a transmitter or receiver.
The objective of this section is to specify the optical interface sufficiently to ensure the following:
a) Intermateability
b) Mechanical/Optical Performance
c) Maximum Supplier Flexibility
NOTE In this clause, only the dimensions necessary to specify the duplex receptacle and receiver are
provided, hereafter referred to as the receptacle. All other dimensions are referenced in the TIA/EIA
604-7 (FOCIS 7) standard

The optical interface connector defined by this document shall conform to:
a) ANSI/TIA/EIA 604-7 (FOCIS 7), Fiber Optic Connector Intermateability Standard, Type SG
b) All dimensions found in ANSI/TIA/EIA-604-7 (FOCIS 7)
c) The active Interface will meet the optical specifications found in annex D of this standard
d) Passive performance requirements found in annex F of this standard
7.2.1

SG optical receptacle

The SG optical transceiver is a ferrule-less receptacle design, and as such, there are numerous
methods for accepting the bare fiber and guiding it to alignment. The ANSI/TIA/EIA 604-7 (FOCIS 7)
standard defines one such method. The alternatives for mechanically controlling the optical fiber to
optimize optical coupling may be accomplished in a variety of ways not defined here.
Figure 22 specifies the SG receptacle, with the following notes:

58

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

M
0.0

X
N

Mechanical
Reference
Plane

AB

B
0.0

Latching Mechanism Detail

G
0.0

J
A

Rx

SECTION A-A

See Note 5

Re
ce
ive
ns
mi
t

See Notes 2 - 4

H
-A-

SG Transceiver

Tra

Tx

AA

SG Optical Plug

NOTES:
1

Reference designators, denoted by a letter, are defined by the TIA/EIA 604-7 duplex SG socket
interface (n=2, m=0).

Internal receptacle cavity to provide clearance for plug, including the latching mechanism, as
defined by TIA/EIA 604-7 SG plug interface. TIA/EIA 604-7 socket interface (d=1) defines one
method of fiber capture.

Optical fiber bend radius 7.5 mm.

Optical fiber axial tip force 1 g.

Latching mechanism may protrude through outer portion of the housing.

Figure 22 SG receptacle

Table 15 Dimensional table for SG receptacle


Reference

Reference

Nominal
5.85

Nominal
5

2.8

7.65

8.1

12.1

1.3

AA

25

1.4

AB

30

59

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

7.2.2 SG optical connector plug


Figure 23 describes the SG duplex Connector Plug envelope dimensions. Full specifications are
defined by ANSI/TIA/EIA 604-7 plug interface (n=2).

Mechanical Reference Plane

Figure 23 SG connector plug envelope dimensions

Table 16 Dimensional table for SG plug


Reference
B

Nominal
11.9

20

7.9

60

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

7.3

LC optical interface

The primary function of the optical interface specification is to define mechanical alignment of the
optical fibers to an optical port on a component such as a transmitter or receiver. See figure 24.

LC Transceiver

LC Duplex Connector Plug

Figure 24 LC connector
The objective of this section is to specify the optical interface sufficiently to ensure the following:
a) Intermateability
b) Mechanical/Optical Performance
c) Maximum Supplier Flexibility
NOTE In this clause, only the dimensions necessary to specify the duplex transmitter and receiver are
provided, hereafter referred to as the receptacle. All other dimensions are referenced in the

TIA/EIA 604-10 standard.


The optical interface connector defined by this document shall conform to:
a) ANSI/TIA/EIA 604-10 (FOCIS 10), Fiber Optic Connector Intermateability Standard, Type LC
b) All dimensions found in ANSI/TIA/EIA 604-10 (FOCIS 10)
c) Passive performance requirements found in annex D of this standard
d) The active Interface will meet the optical specifications found in the physical interface
document
7.3.1 LC optical receptacle
The LC optical transceiver has a mounted receptacle which is in effect one half an adapter as defined
in ANSI/TIA/EIA 604-10 (FOCIS 10). It may contain resilient sleeves to optically align the connector
plug ferrules. The positioning of the ferrule endfaces to optimize optical coupling may be
accomplished in a variety of ways not described here

61

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

.
0.05

0.05

J
A
B
K

-B-

0.10

M B M

H
G
F

0.05

C
M

-C-

0.05 B A

Receptacle Port Interface


Y
REFERENCE
PLANE

OPTICAL
REFERENCE
PLANE

-A-

U
T
S

0.05

W
R
M
L
N

0.025 A
X

0.05

-BB

Figure 25 LC receptacle dimensions


Table 17 Dimensions of the active device receptacle
Reference Nominal
A
3.45
B
2.65
C
4.68
D
0.55
E
1.05
F
2.29 Basic
G
4.68
H
6.7
I
0.25 Radius
J
4.5
K
1.15
L
0.5

Reference Nominal
M
2.92 Diameter
N
To Fit Ferrule
O
1.9
P
15 Degrees Typical
Q
2.3 Radius
R
1.9
S
9.95
T
12.7
U
14.6
V
0.65
W
1.05
X
4.05
Y
11.33

62

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

Figure 25, LC Receptacle, dimensionally specifies the receptacle with the following notes:
1) Reference designators, denoted by letter, are defined by TIA/EIA 604-10 duplex LC adapter
interface (n=2, m=0) drawing.
2) A single keying interface, k=1, is defined.
7.3.2 LC optical plug
Figure 26 describes the LC duplex connector plug envelope dimensions. Full specifications are
defined by the TIA/EIA 604-10 plug interface (n=2).
OPTICAL
REFERENCE
PLANE

MECHANICAL
REFERENCE
PLANE

Figure 26 LC Connector Plug Envelope Dimensions

Table 18 Dimensional table for LC plug


Reference

Nominal

11.33

4.47

9.9 mated, 10.4 free

63

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

7.4

MT-RJ optical interface

The primary function of the optical interface specification is to define mechanical alignment of the
optical fibers to an optical port on a component such as a transmitter or receiver.

Transmit side

Receive

MT-RJ Transceiver

MT-RJ Connector plug

Figure 27 MT connector and receptacle


The objective of this section is to specify the optical interface sufficiently to ensure the following:
a) Intermateability
b) Mechanical/Optical Performance
c) Maximum Supplier Flexibility
NOTE In this clause, only the dimensions necessary to specify the duplex transmitter and receiver are
provided, hereafter referred to as the receptacle. All other dimensions are referenced in the TIA/EIA
604-12 standard.

The optical interface connector defined by this document shall conform to:
a) ANSI/TIA/EIA 604-12 (FOCIS 12), Fiber Optic Connector Intermateability Standard, Type MTRJ
b) All dimensions found in ANSI/TIA/EIA 604-12 (FOCIS 12)
c) The active Interface will meet the optical specifications found in annex D of this standard
d) Passive performance requirements found in annex F of this standard
7.4.1

MT-RJ optical receptacle

The MT-RJ optical transceiver has a mounted receptacle as defined by the ANSI/TIA/EIA 604-12
(FOCIS 12 R-2-1-0-1-1 and FOCIS 12 R-2-1-0-1-2) connector interface for MT-RJ with pins. The
positioning of the ferrule endface to optimize optical coupling may be accomplished in a variety of
ways not described here.

64

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

Figure 28 Active Device receptacle Interface

Table 19 MT-RJ active device receptacle dimensions


Dimensions
Reference Minimum Maximum
A

4,7

4,78

7,2

7,28

Dimensions
Notes

Reference

Minimum Maximum

2,1

82

88

4,1

4,1

2,597

2,603

0,35

2,8

5,45

5,85

0,8

0,25

1,43

1,53

0,15

0,5

0,4

9,1

9,3

Radius

Notes
Degrees

Diameter

7.4.2 MT-RJ optical connector plug


Figure 29 describes the MT-RJ duplex Connector Plug envelope form. Full specifications are defined
by the ANSI/TIA/EIA 604-12 (FOCIS 12) plug connector interface for MT-RJ plug connector
interface, without pins, and for two fibers with a pitch of 0.75 mm.

65

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

Figure 29 MT-RJ Connector Plug Interface Dimensions

Table 20 Dimensional table for MT-RJ plug


Reference Nominal

7.4.3

4.65

7.15

9.1 mated, 10 free

Alignment pin/alignment structure diameter option

Alignment pin/alignment structure diameter options for FOCIS 12 plugs are:


Table 21 Alignment pin/alignment structure diameter options for FOCIS 12 plugs
Dimensions (mm)
Alignment Pin Diameter
Option
t=1
t=2

Minimum
0.698
0.697

Maximum
0.699
0.699

Alignment Structure Diameter


Minimum
0.699
0.699

Maximum
0.7005
0.7015

NOTE Alignment Pin/Alignment structure Diameter Option t = 1 is typically used in single-mode fiber
applications, t = 2 is typically used for multimode applications.

66

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

8
8.1

Optical fiber cable plant specification


SM cable plant specification

This sub-clause specifies a single-mode cable plant for the Fibre Channel data rates of 1,06, 2,12,
and 4,25 GBd at their rated distance of 10 km.
The cable plant is generally insensitive to data rate and therefore any installed portions of the cable
plant may be used at any data rate (see table 22).
Table 22 Single-mode cable plant
400-SM-LL- 200-SM-LL- 100-SM-LC-L
L
L

FC-0
Subclause
Operating Range
m
Cable Plant Dispersion ps/nm-km
Loss Budget
dB

2 -10 000
12
7.8

2 -10 000
12
7.8

2 -10 000
12
7.8

8.1.1 SM optical fiber type


The optical fiber shall conform to IEC 60793-2 Clause 5; Type B.1 fibers.
8.1.2 SM cable plant loss budget
The loss budget for single-mode fiber shall be no greater than specified in table 22. These limits
were arrived at by taking the difference between the minimum transmitter output power and the
receiver sensitivity and subtracting link penalties.
8.1.3 SM optical return loss
The cable plant optical return loss, with the receiver connected, shall be greater than or equal to
12dB. This is required to keep the reflection penalty under control. The receiver shall have a return
loss greater than or equal to one glass air interface.
Connectors and splices shall each have a return loss greater than 26 dB as measured by the
methods of FOTP-107 or equivalent.
8.2

MM cable plant specification

The most commonly used multimode (MM) cable plant is the 62,5 m cable plant. For short
wavelength lasers a 50 m cable plant will have better performance than a 62,5 m cable plant
because of its fiber properties.
Table 23 Multimode cable plant
FC-0
Subclause
Date rate (MB/s)
Operating range (m)
Loss Budget (dB)

400-M6- 200-M6- 100-M6- 400-M5- 200-M5- 100-M5SN-I


SN-I
SN-I
SN-I
SN-I
SN-I
6.2
6.2
6.2
6.2
6.2
6.2
400
200
100
400
200
100
2-70
2-150
2-300
2 - 150 2 - 300 2 - 500
1.78
2.10
3.01
2.06
2.62
3.85

NOTE The operating ranges and loss budgets shown here are based on MM
fiber bandwidth given in table 25. For other MM fiber bandwidths see
Annex D

67

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

8.2.1

MM optical fiber types

The optical fiber shall conform to IEC 60793-2 Clause 4; Type A1b fibers.
Table 24 Multimode fiber types
Nominal Core Diameter
ANSI/TIA/EIA-455-58A
62,5 m
50 m

8.2.2

Cladding Diameter
ANSI/TIA/EIA-455-45A & -176
or ANSI/TIA/EIA-455-48B
125 m
125 m

Nominal Numerical Aperture


ANSI/TIA/EIA-455-177
0,275
0,20

MM modal bandwidth

The following normalized bandwidth values are based on a nominal source wavelength of 850 nm
and 1300 nm as described in table 25).
Table 25 Multimode bandwidth
Fiber

Wavelength

Modal bandwidth, -3dB, min.

850 nm

200 MHz*km

1300 nm(2)

500 MHz*km

850 nm

500 MHz*km

1300 nm(2)

500 MHz*km

62,5 m

50 m

Test per
ANSI/TIA/EIA-455-30B or -51A with
ANSI/TIA/EIA-455-54A
ANSI/TIA/EIA-455-30B or -51A with
ANSI/TIA/EIA-455-54A
ANSI/TIA/EIA-455-30B or -51A with
ANSI/TIA/EIA-455-54A
ANSI/TIA/EIA-455-30B or -51A with
ANSI/TIA/EIA-455-54A

NOTE
1

Some users may install higher modal bandwidth fiber to facilitate future use of the cable plant for
higher bandwidth applications. For shorter distances, a lower bandwidth fiber may be substituted
provided the performance requirements are met. See Annex D

1300 nm MM operation is not part of this standard

8.2.3

MM cable plant loss budget

The loss budget for the multimode fiber cable plant shall be no greater than specified in table 23.
These limits were arrived at by taking the difference between the minimum transmitter optical
modulation amplitude and the receiver optical modulation min. and subtracting the link power
penalties. The limits include the losses of the fiber and other components in the link such as splices
and connectors. The connectors at the ends of the links are included in the transmitter and receiver
specifications and not in the cable plant limit. The link power penalties were calculated using the
methodologies in reference [43]
In some cases the modal dispersion limit may be reached in an installation before the installation loss
limit of table 23.
Conformance to the loss budget requirements shall be verified by means of OFSTP-14.
8.2.4

MM optical return loss

The cable plant optical return loss, with the receiver connected, shall be greater than or equal to 12
dB. This is required to keep the reflection penalty under control. The receiver shall have a return loss
greater than or equal to one glass-air interface.
Connectors and splices shall each have a return loss greater than 20 dB.

68

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

8.2.5 MM chromatic dispersion parameters


The effects of chromatic dispersion on total system bandwidth shall be considered. The spectral
width and center wavelength in combination width the type of fiber may have a significant influence
on distance.
8.3

Connectors and splices

Connectors and splices of any nature are allowed inside the cable plant as long as the resulting loss
conforms to the optical budget of this standard. The number and quality of connections represent a
design trade-off outside the scope of this document.

69

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

70

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

Electrical cable interface specification

This clause defines the interfaces of the serial electrical signal at inter-operability points ,=,==and
in a TxRx Connection. The existence of a ,= or point is determined by the existence of a
connector at that point in a TxRx Connection. Any consecutive pairs, or larger groups, of the , and
points may be coincident in any TxRx Connection. At coincident points the permitted tolerances for
the point farthest from the point shall apply.
Each conforming electrical FC device shall be compatible with this serial electrical interface to allow
interoperability within an FC environment. All Fibre Channel TxRx Connections described in this
clause shall operate within the BER objective (10-12 ). The parameters specified in this clause
support meeting that requirement under all conditions including the minimum input and output
amplitude levels. The corresponding cable plant specifications are described in
clause 10 "Electrical cable plant and connector specifications".
The distance capability is based on ensuring interoperability across multiple vendors supplying the
technologies (both transceivers and cable plants) under the tolerance limits specified in the
document. TxRx Connections operating at these maximum distances may require some form of
equalization to be met. Greater distances may be obtained by specifically engineering a TxRx
Connection based on knowledge of the technology characteristics and the conditions under which
the TxRx Connection is installed and operated. However, such distance extensions are outside the
scope of this standard.
The user needs to ensure that their use conditions at least conform to the specified signal conditions
of this document.
Table 26 General electrical characteristics

Data Rate
Nominal Bit Rate
Tolerance
Media Impedance

Units

100-SE-EL-S

100-DF-EL-S

200-SE-EL-S

200-DF-EL-S

MB/s.
Mbaud
ppm
=(nom.)

100
1 062,5
100
75

100
1 062,5
100
150

200
2 125
100
75

200
2 125
100
150

NOTE The media impedances shown for 100-EL-DF-S and 200-EL-DF-S are the differential, or odd
mode, impedances.

71

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

9.1

Transmitted signal characteristics.

This clause defines the interoperability requirements of the transmitted signal at the driver end of a
TxRx Connection.
Table 27 Transmitted signal characteristics at T, T and T
Units

100-SE-EL-S

100-DF-EL-S 8

200-SE-EL-S

200-DF-EL-S 8

Beta T point
Jitter output

UI Max.

See table 29

See table 29

See table 29

See table 29

mV
mV

1 000
300

1 000
300

1 000
300

1 000
300

X1
X2

UI
UI

See Note 4
X1+0.19

See Note 4
X1+0.19

See Note 4
X1+0.19

See Note 4
X1+0.19

Skew, max.

ps

NA

25

NA

15

Jitter output

UI Max.

See table 29

See table 29

See table 29

See table 29

A2

mV
mV

1 000
325

1 000
325

1 000
325

1 000
325

X1
X2

UI
UI

See Note 4
X1+0.19

See Note 4
X1+0.19

See Note 4
X1+0.19

See Note 4
X1+0.19

Skew, max.

ps

NA

25

NA

15

Jitter output

UI Max.

See table 29

See table 29

See table 29

See table 29

A2

mV
mV

1 000
550

1 000
550

1 000
550

1 000
550

X1
X2

UI
UI

See Note 4
X1+0.19

See Note 4
X1+0.19

See Note 4
X1+0.19

See Note 4
X1+0.19

ps

NA

25

NA

15

0,2
0,1

0,2
0,1

192
75

192
75

70

70

Eye mask, figure 30:

Delta T Point
Eye mask, figure 30:

B1

Gamma T Point
Eye mask, figure 30: B 1

Skew, max.

Eye mask normalized amplitudes, at all points 3


Y1
Y2

none
none

0,2
0,1

0,2
0,1

Rise/Fall Time 20-80%, at all points)


Max.
Min.

ps
ps

Max.

mV(p-p)

385
100

385
100

Transmitter off voltage


70

70

Notes: for table 27 - Transmitted signal characteristics at T, T and T


1

Drivers must meet both the absolute and normalized amplitude requirements.

The B amplitude specification identifies the maximum signal peak (including overshoots) that can be
delivered into a resistive load matching those shown in figure 37, Test loads, on page 83.

The minimum allowed p-p eye amplitude opening that shall be delivered into a resistive load matching
those shown in figure 37, Test loads, on page 83 is twice the A amplitude shown above.

The value of X1 shall be half the value given table 29, Jitter output, on page 75 for jitter frequencies
above a frequency of bit rate / 1 667. The value for X1 applies at a total jitter probability of 10-12. At this

72

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000


level of probability direct visual comparison between the mask and actual signals is not a valid method for
determining compliance with the jitter output requirements, see clause 9.4 on page 77
5

The transmitter off voltage is the maximum voltage measured at point T when the transmitter is logically
turned off or is un-powered. Measurement conditions are specified in annex E.5.

Skew and rise/fall time measurements to be made using an oscilloscope with a bandwidth including
probes of at least 1,8 times the baud rate.

The transmitter skew measurement is only valid for balanced driver configurations. It is the maximum
allowed time difference (on both low-to-high and high-to low transitions) between the true and complement
signals. This time difference is measured at the midway point on the signal swing of the true and
complement signals. These are single-ended measurements and assume a.c. coupling between the
oscilloscope and the driver.

All specifications for 100-EL-DF-S and 200-EL-DF-S are based on differential measurements unless
specifically listed otherwise.

73

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

9.2

Received signal characteristics

This clause defines the interoperability requirements of the delivered signal at the receiver end of a
TxRx Connection.
Table 28 Delivered signal characteristics to R, R and R
Units

100-SE-EL-S

200-SE-EL-S

200-DF-EL-S 3

UI - Max.

See table 29

See table 29

See table 29

See table 29

Eye mask 2 figure 31: Y1

mV

200

200

200

200

Y2

mV

1000

1000

1000

1000

X1

UI

See note 1

See note 1

See note 1

See note 1

X2

UI

0,5

0,5

0,5

0,5

ps max.

NA

200

NA

100

100-DF-EL-S 3

Gamma R point

Jitter Output

Skew 3, 4

Delta R point
UI - Max.

See table 29

See table 29

See table 29

See table 29

Eye mask 2 figure 31: Y1

mV

185

185

185

185

Y2

mV

1000

1000

1000

1000

X1

UI

See note 1

See note 1

See note 1

See note 1

X2

UI

0,5

0,5

0,5

0,5

Skew 3, 4

ps max.

NA

205

NA

105

Jitter Output

UI - Max.

See table 29

See table 29

See table 29

See table 29

Eye mask 2 figure 31: Y1

mV

200

200

200

200

Y2

mV

1000

1000

1000

1000

X1

UI

See note 1

See note 1

See note 1

See note 1

X2

UI

0,5

0,5

0,5

0,5

ps max.

NA

200

NA

100

Jitter Output

Beta R point

Skew 3, 4

Notes: for table 28


1 The value for X1 shall be half the value given for total jitter in table 29 at jitter frequencies above a
frequency of bit rate/1 667.
2

The value for X1 applies at a total jitter probability of 10-12. At this level of probability direct visual
comparison between the mask and actual signals is not a valid method for determining compliance with
the jitter output requirements, see clause 9.4 on page 77
Skew measurement to be made when receiving any primitive signal or sequence, using an oscilloscope
whose bandwidth, including probes is at least 1,8 times the baud rate. The measurement is to be made at
the sink side of mated connector pair, and across a load equivalent to those shown in figure 37, Test
loads, on page 83
The differential skew is the maximum allowed time difference (on both low-to-high and high-to low
transitions) between the true and complement signals measured at point R. The figure given assumes a
combined maximum transmitter and maximum cable skew. This time difference is measured at the
midway point on the signal swing of the true and complement signals. These are single-ended
measurements and assume a.c. coupling between the driver and the oscilloscope.
All specifications for 100-EL-DF-S and 200-EL-DF-S are based on differential measurements unless
specifically listed otherwise.

74

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

9.3

Jitter characteristics

This clause defines, at every compliance point, the allowable jitter (See table 29), and the jitter that
must be tolerated (See table 30). Both tables contain entries for inter-enclosure TxRx Connections
and for intra-enclosure TxRx Connections.
Unless identified to the contrary, equipment for use inside enclosures can be expected to comply with
the intra-enclosure point specification. Similarly, enclosures can be expected to comply with the
inter-enclosure point specification.
The values for jitter in this clause are measured at the mid amplitude point (xxx-SE-EL-s), or the
differential zero volt level (xxx-DF-EL-S).
Table 29 Jitter output
100-SE-EL-S and 100-DF-EL-S
Inter-enclosure, max. 1
Units: UI pk-pk
Deterministic (UI p-p)
Total (UI p-p)

0,10

0,11

0,12

0,13

0,35

0,36

0,37

0,38

0,21

0,23

0,25

0,27

0,54

0,56

0,58

0,60

Intra-enclosure, max. 1
Units: UI pk-pk
Deterministic (UI p-p)
Total (UI p-p)

0,10

0,11

0,37

0,38

0,21

0,23

0,58

0,60

200-SE-EL-S and 200-DF-EL-S


Inter-enclosure, max. 1
Units: UI pk-pk
Deterministic (UI p-p)
Total (UI p-p)

0,13

0,14

0,16

0,37

0,39

0,40

0,25

0,26

0,30

0,57

0,59

0,60

Intra-enclosure 1
Units: UI pk-pk
Deterministic (UI p-p)
Total (UI p-p)

0,18

0,20

0,33

0,35

0,30

0,33

0,52

0,55

Notes:
1

Total jitter is the sum of deterministic jitter and random jitter. If the actual deterministic jitter is less than
the maximum specified, then the random jitter may increase as long as the total jitter does not exceed
the specified maximum total jitter.

Total jitter is specified at a probability of 10-12.

The deterministic and total values in this table apply to jitter after application of a single pole high-pass
frequency-weighting function, which progressively attenuates jitter at 20 dB/decade below a frequency of
bit rate/1 667.

75

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

Table 30 Jitter tolerance


100-SE-EL-S and 100-DF-EL-S 1
Inter-enclosure, min.
Units: UI pk-pk

Sinusoidal swept freq. (SJ)


637 KHz 4 to > 5 MHz

NA

0,10

0,10

0,10

0,10

0,10

0,10

0,10

Deterministic (DJ)
637 KHz-531 MHz

NA

0,11

0,12

0,13

0,35

0,36

0,37

0,38

Total 2,3

NA

0,33

0,35

0,37

0,64

0,66

0,68

0,70

Units: UI pk-pk

Sinusoidal swept freq. (SJ)


637 KHz 4 to > 5 MHz

NA

0,10

0,10

0,10

Deterministic (DJ)
637 KHz-531 MHz

NA

0,11

0,37

0,38

Total 2,3

NA

0,33

0,68

0,70

Intra-enclosure, min.

200-SE-EL-S and 200-DF-EL-S 1


Inter-enclosure, min.
Units: UI pk-pk

Sinusoidal swept freq. (SJ)


1274 KHz 4 to > 5 MHz.

NA

0,10

0,10

0,10

0,10

0,10

Deterministic (DJ)
1274 KHz-1062 MHz.

NA

0,14

0,16

0,37

0,39

0,40

Total 2,3

NA

0,36

0,40

0,67

0,69

0,70

Intra-enclosure, min.
Units: UI pk-pk

Sinusoidal swept freq. (SJ)


1274 KHz 4 to > 5 MHz.

NA

0,10

0,10

0,10

Deterministic (DJ)
1274 KHz-1062 MHz.

NA

0.20

0.33

0,40

Total 2,3

NA

0,43

0,62

0,65

Notes:
1

The jitter values given are normative for a combination of DJ, RJ, and SJ which receivers shall be able to
tolerate without exceeding a BER of 10-12.

No value is given for random jitter (RJ). For compliance with this spec, the actual random jitter amplitude
shall be the value that brings total jitter to the stated value at a probability of 10-12.

Receivers shall tolerate sinusoidal jitter of progressively greater amplitude at lower frequencies,
according to the mask in figure 32, combined with the same DJ and RJ levels as were used in the high
frequency sweep.

The additional 0,1 UI of sinusoidal jitter is added to ensure the receiver has sufficient operating margin in
the presence of external interference.

76

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

9.4

Eye masks.

The eye masks shown in this clause shall be interpreted as graphical representations of the voltage
and time limits. The time values cover all but 10-12 of the jitter population. The random content of the
total jitter population has a range of 7 sigma. Current oscilloscope technology only supports
approximately 3 sigma, therefore the traditional method of using an oscilloscope to compare the
signals against these masks to ascertain jitter compliance is invalid. The Oscilloscope remains valid
for determining slew rates, and under and overshoots. The eye diagram masks do not include the
effects of jitter at frequencies below a frequency of bit rate/1667 that would be removed by the
frequency-weighting function described in table 29 note 3.
9.4.1 Transmitted eye mask at T, T and T.

1+Y2

1
A
Absolute amplitude

Normalised amplitude

1-Y1

0,5

Y1
0
-Y2

0V

-A

-B

X1

X2
1-X2
Normalized time (UI)

1-X1

X1

X2
1-X2
Normalized time (UI)

1-X1

Figure 30 Normalized (left) and absolute (right) eye diagram masks at T, T and T.
For unbalanced drivers the absolute amplitude values assume AC coupling between the test load
and the driver. Drivers must meet the normalized and the absolute amplitude requirements. The Y1
and Y2 amplitudes allow signal overshoot of 10% and undershoot of 20%, relative to the amplitudes
determined to be 1 and 0.
To accurately determine the 1 and 0 amplitudes for use with the normalized mask use an
oscilloscope having an internal histogram capability. Use the voltage histogram capability and set
the time limits of the histogram to extend from 0,4 UI to 0,6 UI. Set the voltage limits of the histogram
to include only the data associated with the 1 level. The 1 level to be used with the normalized mask
shall be the mean of the histogram. Repeat this procedure for the 0 level.
Additional sinusoidal jitter below a frequency of bit rate /1 667 may be present provided that it does
not exceed the sinusoidal jitter mask shown in figure 32, Sinusoidal jitter mask, on page 79. The
eye diagram mask assumes that the effects of such jitter are removed by the frequency-weighting
function described in table 29, Jitter output, on page 75 note 3.

77

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

9.4.2

Received eye mask at R, R and R.

Amplitude

Y2
Y1
0
-Y1
-Y2
0

X2
1-X1
1-X2
Normalised time (UI)
X1

Figure 31 Eye diagram mask at R, R and R


The received eye mask does not include the effects of jitter at frequencies below a frequency of bit
rate/1 667 that do not exceed the mask of figure 32, Sinusoidal jitter mask, on page 79.
9.4.3

Jitter tolerance masks

Tolerance eye masks at T, T and T shall be based on figure 30 and shall be constructed using the
X2, Y1 and Y2 values given in table 27. X1 values shall be half the value for total jitter given in table 30
for jitter value sfrequencies above bit rate/1 667.
Note that the xT tolerance masks are identical to the output masks (per table 27) except that X1 and
X2 values are each increased by half the amount of the sinusoidal jitter values given in table 30.
Tolerance eye masks at R, R and R shall be based on figure 31 and shall be constructed using the
X2 and Y2 values given in table 28. X1 shall be half the value for total jitter given in table 30 for jitter
frequencies above bit rate/1 667. However, the leading and trailing edge slopes of figure 31 (with
ALL values from table 27) shall be preserved. As a result the amplitude value of Y1 will be less than
that given in table 28 and must therefore be calculated from those slopes.
Note that the X1 points in the xR tolerance masks are greater than the X1 points in the output masks
(per table 27), again due to the addition of sinusoidal jitter.

78

Peak - peak amplitude (UI)

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

1,5

FC = nominal baud frequency.


Frequencies in parenthesis are
for FC = 1 062,5 MBd.

0,1
FC / 1 667
(637 KHz.)
Sinusoidal jitter frequency (log/log plot)

FC / 25 000

Figure 32 Sinusoidal jitter mask

79

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

9.5

Impedance specifications
Table 31 FC-PI measured impedance 1,2
Units

100-SE-EL-S

100-DF-EL-S

200-SE-EL-S

200-DF-EL-S

TDR risetime

ps

100

100

75

75

Media (cable) 3,4

75 5

150 10

75 5

150 10

Media (PCB) 3,4

75 7.5

150 15

75 7.5

150 15

Through Connection 5

75 15

150 30

75 15

150 30

Exception window (max.) 5,6

ps

800

800

NA

NA

Exception window 5,6

75 25

150 50

NA

NA

Transmission line terminator

75 5

150 10

75 5

150 10

Receiver termination
impedance 8,9,10

75 15

150 30

75 15

150 30

Return Loss (min.) 10

dB

15

15

15

15

Notes:
1

All times indicated for TDR measurements are recorded times. Recorded times are twice the transit
time of the TDR signal.

All measurements are made through mated connector pairs.

The media impedance measurement identifies the impedance mismatches present in the media when
terminated in its characteristic impedance. This measurement includes mated connectors at both ends
of the media, where they exist, and any intermediate connectors or splices.

Where the media has an electrical length of > 4 ns the procedure detailed in SFF document 8410, or an
equivalent procedure, shall be used to determine the impedance.

The through connection tolerance and the exception window may be applied only at the interoperability
points, and shall be wholly contained within 2 ns 1 of that point.

The Exception Window begins at the point where the measured impedance first falls below the
impedance tolerance limit for Through Connection. It ends at the point where the measured impedance
subsequently remains within the limits for Through Connection impedance.

During the Exception Window, no single excursion shall exceed the Through Connection impedance
tolerance for a period 1 greater than twice the TDR risetime specified for the measurement.

The receiver termination impedance tolerance covers all time points between R , R
transmission line terminator. This measurement shall be made from point R 2.

Around the time point associated with point R, the input capacitance of the receiver and its connection
to the transmission line may cause the measured impedance to fall below the minimum impedances
specified in this table. The area of the dip caused by this capacitance is directly proportional to the
capacitance. An approximate value for the area is given by the product of the amplitude of the dip (in
units of rho) and its width 1 (in ps) measured at the half amplitude point. The product calculated by this
method shall not be greater than 150 ps. The amplitude is defined as being the difference in rho
between the rho at the nominal impedance and the rho at the minimum impedance point

and the

10 All impedance measurements shall be TDR measurements except where the receiver termination
being tested includes inductive components such as transformers. When inductive components exist in
the receiver termination a swept frequency Return Loss or VSWR measurement may be more
appropriate. The frequency sweep shall cover the range Bit rate/10 to Bit rate/2.

80

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

9.6

Electrical TxRx connections

TxRx Connections may be divided into TxRx Connection Segments. (See figure 9, Example of
physical location of reference and interoperability points, on page 36.) In a single TxRx Connection
individual TxRx Connection Segments may be formed from differing media and materials, including
traces on printed wiring boards and optical fibers. This clause applies only to TxRx Connection
Segments that are formed from an electrically conductive media.
Each electrical TxRx Connection Segment shall comply with the impedance requirements of table 31
for the media from which they are formed. An optional equalizer network, when present in a TxRx
Connection, shall exist and operate as part of the cable plant.
TxRx Connections that are composed entirely of electrical conducting media shall be applied only to
homogenous ground applications such as between devices within an enclosure or rack, or between
enclosures interconnected by a common ground return or ground plane. This restriction minimizes
safety and interference concerns caused by any voltage differences that could otherwise exist
between equipment grounds.
9.7

Compliance points

For the purposes of this clause, compliance points are defined as those interoperability points at
which the interoperability specifications are met. The default inter-enclosure transmitter compliance
points are shown in figure 33 and in figure 34. The default intra-enclosure transmitter compliance
points are shown in figure 35 and in figure 36.
Unless identified to the contrary, equipment intended to provide the =points of an inter-cabinet TxRx
connection shall meet interoperability specifications at points R and T. (i.e. where the enclosure
Faraday shield transitions between the enclosure and the cable shield, as shown in figure 9,
Example of physical location of reference and interoperability points, on page 36.) If sections of
transmission line exist within the Faraday shield, they can be considered part of the associated FC
device, or transmit/receive network, and not part of the cable plant.
Unless identified to the contrary, equipment intended to provide the =points of an inter-cabinet TxRx
connection shall meet interoperability specifications at points R and T.
Unless identified to the contrary, equipment or devices intended to provide the points of an intra
cabinet TxRx Connection shall meet the interoperability specifications at the FC device connector
points, R and T , as shown in figure 9, Example of physical location of reference and
interoperability points, on page 36. In the embedded environment of an intra-cabinet TxRx
Connection, the presence of a signal ground is only required for unbalanced media. The presence of
a ground reference may be necessary for some balanced media, depending on the specific type of
transmission line used between the FC device connectors.
The interface specifications assume that all measurements are made after a mated connector pair,
relative to the source or destination of the signal using a load equivalent to those of figure 37, Test
loads, on page 83

81

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

From T
T=or T

To
Media

From T
T=or T

To
Media

(Mandatory Ground)
(Mandatory Ground)

Unbalanced Media

Balanced Media

Figure 33 Inter-enclosure transmitter compliance point T

From
Media

To R
R=or R

From
Media

To R
R=or R

(Mandatory Ground)
(Mandatory Ground)

Balanced Media

Unbalanced Media

Figure 34 Inter-enclosure receiver compliance point R

From
Transmit
Network

To
T Media

From
Transmit
Network

To
Media

(Optional Ground)
(Optional Ground and Shield)

Unbalanced Media

Balanced Media

Figure 35 Intra-enclosure transmitter compliance point T

From
Media

To
Recei
ve
Netwo

From
Media

To
Receiv
e
Netwo

(Optional Ground)
(Optional Ground and Shield)

Unbalanced Media

Balanced Media

Figure 36 Intra-enclosure receiver compliance point R

82

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

9.8

Driver characteristics

The driver is assumed to have output swings approximating those of Emitter Coupled Logic (ECL), as
measured at T in figure 38 or figure 39 as appropriate.
For all inter-enclosure TxRx Connections, the output driver shall be AC coupled to the cable through
a transmission network.
For all intra-enclosure TxRx Connections the driver may be either AC or DC-coupled to the media.
The driver shall have the output voltages and timing listed in table 27, Transmitted signal characteristics
at bT, dT and gT, on page 72 and table 29, Jitter output, on page 75, measured at the designated

interoperability points. The default point is T for inter-cabinet TxRx connections and T for intracabinet TxRx connections. The measurements shall be made across a load equivalent to that shown
in figure 37, Test loads, on page 83.
==1%
10nF 75

10nF

75
==1%

75 = 1%

10nF

(Optional Ground)

Unbalanced Test Load

Balanced Test load


NOTE: 10 nF capacitors are only required if output under test is not DC isolated.

Figure 37 Test loads


The mask of the transmitter eye diagram is given in figure 30, Normalized (left) and absolute (right)
eye diagram masks at bT, dT and gT., on page 77. The normalized amplitudes, Y1 and Y2, allow
signal overshoots of 10% and undershoots of 20%. The driver shall meet both the normalized and
absolute values.

9.9

Receiver characteristics

The receiver shall be AC-coupled to the media through a receive network located between points R
and R as shown in figure 38 and figure 39. The receive network shall terminate the TxRx
Connection by an equivalent impedance of 75 or 150 , as specified in table 31, FC-PI measured
impedance 1,2, on page 80.
The receiver shall operate within the BER objective (10-12) when an FC signal with valid voltage and
timing characteristics is delivered to the interoperability point from an unbalanced 75 =(xxx-SE-ELS), or balanced 150 (xxx-DF-EL-S) source. The delivered FC signal shall be considered valid if it
meets the voltage and timing limits specified in figure 31, Eye diagram mask at bR, dR and gR, on
page 78 and table 29, Jitter output, on page 75 when measured across a load equivalent to those of
figure 37, Test loads, on page 83.
Additionally the receiver shall also operate within the BER objective when the signal at T has the
additional sinusoidal jitter present that is specified in table 30, Jitter tolerance, on page 76. Jitter
tolerance figures are given in table 30, Jitter tolerance, on page 76 for all interoperability points in a
TxRx Connection. The figures given assume that any external interference occurs prior to the point
at which the test is applied. When testing the jitter tolerance capability of a receiver the additional 0.1
UI of sinusoidal jitter may be reduced by an amount proportional to the actual externally induced

83

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

interference between the application point of the test and R. Note: The addition of additional jitter
reduces the eye opening in both voltage and time; see 9.4.3 "Jitter tolerance masks".

9.10 Example TxRx connections

75 =COAX
TRANSMIT
NETWORK

SERDES

RECEIVE
NETWORK

TNC

BNC

SERDES

Homogenous ground

Figure 38 Example xxx-SE-EL-S inter-enclosure


TxRx connection with 75 unbalanced cable

SHIELDED TW ISTED PAIR


Z 0 = 150

+
SERDES

+
TRANSMIT
NETWORK

RECEIVE
NETWORK

SERDES

Homogenous ground

Figure 39 Example xxx-DF-EL-S inter-enclosure TxRx with 150 balanced cable

84

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

10

Electrical cable plant and connector specifications

This clause defines the TxRx Connection requirements for a Fibre Channel electrical cable plant and
its connectors.
It is the implementers responsibility to ensure that the impedances, attenuation (loss), jitter, and
shielding are within the operating limits of the TxRx Connection type and data rate being
implemented.
An optional equalizer network may exist and operate as part of the cable plant. It shall be used to
correct for frequency selective attenuation loss of the transmitted signal, as well as timing variations
due to the differences in propagation delay time between higher and lower frequency components.
An equalizer should need no adjustment.
For those cables containing embedded equalization circuits, the operation of the cable may be both
data rate and length specific. All cables containing such circuits shall be marked with information
identifying the specific designed operational characteristics of the cable assembly.

10.1

Shielding

Cable assemblies shall have a transfer impedance through the shield(s) of less than 100 m/m from
DC through the baudrate/2 equivalent frequency.
Cable shield(s) on inter-enclosure cables shall be earthed through the bulkhead connector shell(s) on
both the transmitter and receiver ends as shown in figure 33, Inter-enclosure transmitter compliance
point gT, on page 82, figure 34, Inter-enclosure receiver compliance point gR, on page 82, figure
38 and figure 39.

10.2

Cable interoperability

All styles of balanced cables are interoperable; i.e., electrically compatible with minor impact on TxRx
Connection-length capability when intermixed. The unbalanced (coaxial) cables are also
interoperable. Interoperability implies that the transmitter and receiver level and timing specifications
are preserved, with the trade-off being distance capability in an intermixed system. Any electrically
compatible, interoperable unbalanced or balanced cables may be used to achieve goals of longer
distance, higher data rate, or lower cost as desired in the system implementation, if they are
connector, impedance, and propagation mode compatible.
When cable types are mixed, it is the responsibility of the implementer to validate that the lengths of
cable used do not distort the signal beyond the received signal specifications referenced in
clause 9.9 "Receiver characteristics"
The balanced cables are incompatible with unbalanced cables in terms of characteristic impedance,
mode of connection to the transceiver, and other electrical and mechanical parameters. Different
connectors are specified for balanced and unbalanced cables to avoid user mixing.
At transmission rates of 1062,5 Mbaud or greater, particular attention must be given to the transition
between cable segments. No more than four connection points should be present from the
transmitter to the receiver.

10.3
10.3.1

Unbalanced cable connectors


Inter-enclosure connectors for unbalanced cable

Connections between enclosures require the use of shielded cable assemblies, terminated in
polarized shielded connectors. All unbalanced cable types shall be connected using either style-1 or
style-2 unbalanced connectors.

85

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

Standard cable assemblies shall have style-1 connectors at both ends of the cable, or style-2
connectors at both ends of the cable. Cables may also be constructed with both a style-1 and style-2
connector for use in mixed connector installations or to adapt from one style to the other.
The cable connector shall be the plug or male connector while the bulkhead connector shall be the
receptacle or female connector.

10.3.1.1 Style-1 unbalanced cable connector


The style-1 connectors for unbalanced cable shall be industry standard 75 BNC and TNC type
connectors, as shown in figure 38. The electrical performance of the 75 BNC and TNC connectors
shall be compatible with video style connectors specified by IEC 169-8 and IEC 169-17.
The mechanical compatibility for BNC type (bayonet lock coupling) connectors is defined by IEC 1698. The mechanical compatibility for TNC type (threaded coupling) connectors is defined by IEC 16917. The primary use of unbalanced cables is for interconnection of enclosures.
These two connector types (BNC and TNC) are specified to provide polarization to prevent the
incorrect connection of transmitter-to-transmitter or receiver-to-receiver. The end of such a cable,
connected to an unbalanced transmitter, shall be implemented with a male BNC-type connector and
the receiving end shall be implemented with a male TNC-type connector. The transmitter and
receiver shall be implemented using female BNC and TNC type connectors respectively.
Should a case occur where, through a cabling error or the incorrect use of in-line splices or other
adapters, two transmitters or receivers are directly connected, no damage shall occur to any
transmitter, receiver, or other TxRx Connection component in the system. The TxRx Connection
shall be able to withstand such an invalid connection without component failure or degradation for an
indefinite period.

10.3.1.2 Style-2 unbalanced cable connector


The style-2 connectors for unbalanced cable shall be industry standard 50 SMA. The electrical
performance of the 50 SMA connectors shall be compatible with IEC 169-15.
The mechanical compatibility for SMA-type connectors is defined by IEC 169-15. Primary uses of
unbalanced cables are for interconnection of enclosures.
Both ends of such a cable shall be implemented with a male SMA-type connector. The transmitter
and receiver shall be implemented using female SMA-type connectors.
Should a case occur where, through a cabling error or the incorrect use of in-line splices or other
adapters, two transmitters or receivers are directly connected, no damage shall occur to any
transmitter, receiver, or other TxRx Connection component in the system. The TxRx Connection
shall be able to withstand such an invalid connection without component failure or degradation for an
indefinite period.

10.3.2

Intra-enclosure connectors for unbalanced cable

Connections within an enclosure do not normally require the same level of shielding as connections
external to an enclosure. For these internal connections an alternative connector may be used that
interfaces with industry standard headers with 0,64 mm (0,025 in) square posts on 2,54 mm (0,100
in) center spacing. Due to size constraints, this connector is only intended for use with the miniature
coaxial cable.
These connectors are generally not entirely shielded and leakage of RFI may occur. A shielded
enclosure and/or other RF leakage control techniques such as ferrite beads or lossy tubing is
recommended for compliance with EMC standards, even with double shielded cables.

86

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

10.4 Balanced cable connectors


Balanced cables, when used in full duplex TxRx Connections, shall be wired in a crossover fashion
as shown in figure 40, with each pair being attached to the transmit contacts at one end of the cable
and the receive contacts at the other end.

T+
T-

T+
T-

R+
RShield

R+
RShield

Figure 40 Balanced cable wiring

10.4.1

Inter-enclosure connectors for balanced cable

Connections between enclosures require the use of shielded cable assemblies, terminated in
polarized shielded connectors. All balanced cable types shall be connected using either style-1 or
style-2 balanced cable connectors.
Standard cable assemblies shall have style-1 connectors at both ends of the cable, or style-2
connectors at both ends of the cable. Cables may also be constructed with both a style-1 and style-2
connector for use in mixed connector installations or to adapt from one style to the other.
The cable connector shall be the plug or male connector while the bulkhead connector shall be the
receptacle or female connector.
Both styles of inter-enclosure connectors may be populated with additional contacts to support
additional functions. The presence of such contacts in the connector assemblies does not imply
support for additional functions.
The suggested use for these additional contacts or contact locations is listed table 32

Table 32 Optional inter-enclosure contact uses


Pin Number
Contact Name

Style
1

Style
2

Power supply, nominal +5V dc

Module fault detect

Mechanical key

Output disable

Signal ground / +5V dc return

10.4.1.1 Style-1 balanced cable connector


The style-1 connector for balanced cable is the 9-pin shielded D-subminiature connector conforming
to IEC 807-3. The plug (male) half of the connector shall be mounted on the cable. One connector is

87

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

required to connect both transmitting and receiving shielded pairs at one node. The connector pin
assignments are shown in figure 41. Unused pin positions within the connector body are reserved.
Electrical and mechanical details are also given in document SFF 8480.
Should a case occur where, through a cabling error or the incorrect use of in-line splices or other
adapters, two transmitters or receivers are directly connected, no damage shall occur to any
transmitter, receiver, or other TxRx Connection component in the system. The TxRx Connection
shall be able to withstand such an invalid connection without component failure or degradation for an
indefinite period.
5

1 = Transmit +
9

6 = Transmit 5 = Receive +

9 = Receive Shell = Cable Shield

Figure 41 Style-1 balanced connector receptacle contact locations

10.4.1.2 .Style-2 balanced cable connector


The style-2 connector for balanced cables, shown in figure 42, shall conform to the mechanical and
electrical characteristics of IEC 61076-3-103. The connector pin assignments are shown in figure 43.
Electrical and mechanical details are also given in document SFF 8420.
Should a case occur where, through a cabling error or the incorrect use of in-line splices or other
adapters, two transmitters or receivers are directly connected, no damage shall occur to any
transmitter, receiver, or other TxRx Connection component in the system. The TxRx Connection
shall be able to withstand such an invalid connection without component failure or degradation for an
indefinite period.

Figure 42 Style-2 plug and receptacle


10.4.1.2.1 Style-2 plug
The plug (male) half of the connector shall be mounted on the cable. One connector is required to
connect both the transmitting and the receiving shielded pairs at one node. The style-2 plug is shown
in the left half of figure 42.

88

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

10.4.1.2.2 Style-2 receptacle


The style-2 receptacle is shown in the right half of figure 42. This connector mates with both transmit
and receive balanced pairs. The connector contains eight pin locations plus an external shield. Pin
locations 1, 3, 6, and 8 shall be populated in the connector body. Unused pin positions within the
connector body are reserved. The connector pin assignments are shown in figure 43.
1 = Transmit +
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

3 = Transmit 6 = Receive 8 = Receive +


Shell = Cable Shield

Figure 43 Style-2 balanced connector receptacle contact locations


10.4.2

Intra-enclosure connectors for balanced cable

TxRx connections that remain entirely within an enclosure do not normally require the same level of
shielding as connections external to an enclosure. These connections may be implemented with any
number or mix of transmission line types. The target differential impedance for these intra-enclosure
connections is 150.
Due to the shorter distances within an enclosure, and the uncontrolled impedance of the mating
connectors, it is advised that source matching be used to limit the effect of signal reflections.
Any number of styles of connectors, including the balanced connectors documented in
clause 10.4.1 "Inter-enclosure connectors for balanced cable", may be used to implement intraenclosure TxRx connections. Connectors for these connections are specified by the desired
functionality of the connectors. These connectors are not entirely shielded and leakage of RFI may
occur.
A shielded enclosure (or other RF leakage control techniques such as ferrite beads or lossy tubing) is
recommended for compliance with EMC standards, even when used with double-shielded balanced
cables.

10.4.2.1 Integral FC device balanced connector


The integral intra-enclosure connector for FC devices supports multiple TxRx connections. It is
documented to carry power for the FC device as well as numerous configuration and status options.
Internal FC devices that require these capabilities shall use the 40-position SCA-2 connector
specified in EIA-700 A0AF (SP-3652), and shall conform to the signaling requirements of SFF-8451
and SFF-8045.2
This connector is shown in figure 44, and is primarily designed for backplane or rack mount
applications. The contact locations are defined in figure 45.

2. SFF

documents are available by FAX access from 408-741-1600, or may be purchased from Global
Engineering at 303-792-2181

89

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

DEVICE SIDE

ADVANCED
GROUNDING
CONTACTS

ADVANCED
GROUNDING
CONTACTS

CABLE / BACKPLANE
SIDE

Figure 44 Intra-enclosure integral FC device connector

90

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

DEVICE SIDE
POSN 20

POSN 1

POSN 40

POSN 21

POSN 1

POSN 20

POSN 21

POSN 40

DEVICE SIDE

CABLE /
BACKPLANE
SIDE

CABLE/BACKPLANE SIDE

Figure 45 Contact numbering for integral FC device connector


10.4.3

Non-device inter-enclosure connectors

Internal connectors that are not directly attached to the FC devices (non-device internal connectors)
are not controlled by this standard. These connectors may be used within the enclosure as part of
the TxRx connection. Such connections are still required to meet the performance requirements of
the transmit and receive signals at the compliance points.

91

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

92

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

Annex A(informative)
Test Methods
This annex defines terms, measurement techniques and conditions for testing jitter and wave
shapes. This annex deals with issues specific to Fibre Channel and is not intended to supplant standard test procedures referenced in the specifications.
This annex directly applies to verification of terminal equipment compliance to the Fibre Channel
specification and the relevant optical and electrical interface specifications. In some instances these
procedures may be applicable to measurement of a single component of the system.

A.1 Transmit interface


A.1.1

Optical spectrum measurement

The center wavelength and spectral width RMS value of the transmit interface can be measured as
appropriate using an optical spectrum analyzer per FOTP-127. The patch cable used to couple the
light from the transmit interface to the spectrum analyzer should be short to minimize spectral filtering
by the patch cable. The transmit signal during the measurement should be any valid 8B/10B code
pattern.

A.1.2

Waveforms

A.1.2.1 Mask of the eye diagram


The measurement of the mask of the eye diagram is covered in clause 6 and clause 9.4. The measurement should be performed with traffic consisting of frames of data so that the receiving equipment may perform its normal synchronizing operations. Recomended frame contents are detailed in
the MJS technical report (ref. 42 on page 17).

A.1.2.2 Pulse parameters


The rise and fall times of lasers may be measured using a sequence of K28.7 transmission characters. This constitutes a square wave at 10% of the bit rate.
The optical measurement system may have a low pass fourth-order Bessel-Thompson transfer function (described in clause 6.1.1 on page 43) or equivalent. If a separate filter having a fourth order
Bessel-Thompson transfer function is used, care should be taken with source and load impedances
of the equipment connected to the filter. In filters constructed with common techniques the proper
transfer function is obtained only when the source and load impedances are at a specified value over
the frequency range of interest. Other impedance values may result in the introduction of significant
waveform distortion.
If a separate filter having a fourth order Bessel-Thompson transfer function is used, care should be
taken with source and load impedances of the equipment connected to the filter. In filters constructed with common techniques the proper transfer function is obtained only when the source and load
impedances are at a specified value over the frequency range of interest. Other impedance values
may result in the introduction of significant waveform distortion.

A.1.3

Jitter measurements

The jitter output specifications apply in the context of a 10-12 bit error rate (BER). Jitter may be measured with methods as described in the MJS technical report (ref. 42 on page 17). The optical measurement system may have a low pass fourth-order Bessel-Thompson transfer function (described in
clause 6.1.1 on page 43) or equivalent.

93

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

A.2

Receive interface

The source of the receive interface test signal may be any source conforming to the worst case limits
of the receive interface interface specifications of the media under test.
The test should be performed with traffic consisting of frames of data so that the receiving equipment
may perform its normal synchronizing operations. Recomended frame contents are detailed in the
MJS technical report (ref. 42 on page 17).
A compliant node should receive the test signal over the range of conditions specified with a
BER 1012. The requirements in clause 6 were written in terms of BER to facilitate the specification
of components to be used in a particular implementation.
The characteristics of the test signal may be measured with the methods outlined in the MJS technical report (ref. 42 on page 17).

A.3

Poormans curve fit

The MJS document (sections D.2.4 and Annex A) describes a technique for using a BERT scan to
determine eye opening and jitter. For highest accuracy, the bathtub curve should be measured over a
high number of Bit Error Rate (BER) points and curve-fitted with a least-squares method to estimate
equivalent DJ, RJ, and TJ values. However, a simple and fast method for estimating these values
may be applied using only 2 measurement points.
The following steps describe a process for estimating RJ, DJ, and TJ values from a 2 point BERT
scan measurement:
a) Measure the eye opening at 2 BERs (suggested BER values are 1E-9 and 1E-5). Define one of
the BER values as BER0 and the other as BER1; define t0 for the opening at BER0 and t1 for
the opening at BER1.
b) For each BER value, determine the associated Q from the inverse normal cumulative probability distribution. For example, these can be calculated using Qn = -qnorm(BERn,0,1) in Mathcad. For 1E-5, Q = 4.27 and for 1E-9, Q = 6.0. (Q = 7.03 for 1E-12).
c) Calculate the jitter results. RJrms is the rms (1 sigma) value for RJ, whereas DJ and TJ are given as pk-pk values.

Equation 1 Bit error rate

BER =

1
2

Q2
x2
1
exp dx
exp
, BER < 10 3
Q
2
2
Q 2

Q is the number of RMS jitter magnitudes for the given BER. The random jitter may then be expressed as:

Equation 2 Random jitter


|

t1 t0
RJ rms = 0.5 --------------------Q1 Q0

94

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

where Q1 is evaluated at t1 and where evaluation times t1 and t2 are located as shown in
figure A.1. In this case the clock used should be the same as used to determine the
eye opening.

* *

t1

t2

Figure A.1 Eye diagram


Equation 3 Determanistic jitter

DJ = UI t 0 ( 2 Q 0 RJ

rms

where UI = 941.2 psec for 1062.5 GBaud, etc

Equation 4 Total jitter

TJ = DJ + 14 RJ rms
NOTE the minimum value for measured BER is constrained by test time (10 errors are suggested as an absolute minimum to get reasonable statistical confidence); the maximum value is constrained by potential departure of actual results from the assumed curve fit shape (BER = 1E-4 should be maximum value used).
Otherwise, the farther apart the 2 points are, the lower the susceptibility the results will have to noise.

A.4 Relative intensity noise (RIN) (OMA) measuring procedure


This procedure describes a component test which may not be appropriate for a system level test depending on the implementation.

A.4.1

Test objective

When lasers which are subject to reflection induced noise effects are operated in a cable plant with a
low optical return loss the lasers will produce an amount of noise which is a function of the magnitude
and polarization state of the reflected light.
The magnitude of the reflected light tends to be relatively constant. However, the polarization state
varies significantly as a function of many cable parameters, particularly cable placement. In a cable
plant which is physically fixed in place the variation is slow. If the fibre is subject to motion, such as
occurs in a jumper cable, the change may be sudden and extreme. The effect is unpredictable
changes in the noise from the laser with the result that the communication link may exhibit sudden
and unexplainable bursts of errors.
The solution to this is to assure that the lasers used do not generate excessive noises under conditions of the worst case combination of polarization and magnitude of reflected optical signal.
The noise generated is a function of the return loss of the cable plant. For the Fibre Channel the
specified return loss is 12 dB resulting in the notation of RIN[12] for the relative intensity noise.
95

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

A.4.2 General test description


The test arrangement is shown in figure A.2. The test cable between the Device Under Test (DUT)
and the detector forms an optical path having a single discrete reflection at the detector with the
specified optical return loss. There shall be only one reflection in the system as the polarization rotator can only adjust the polarization state of one reflection at a time.

POLARIZATION OPTICALELECTRICAL
ROTATOR
CONVERTER
DEVICE
UNDER
TEST

SINGLEMODE
FIBER
AMPLIFIER
(OPTIONAL)

LOW PASS
FILTER

POWER
METER

Figure A.2 RIN (OMA) test setup


Both the OMA power and noise power are measured by AC coupling the O/E converter into the high
frequency electrical power meter. If needed, an amplifier may be used to boost the signal to the power meter.
A low pass filter is used between the photodetector and the power meter to limit the noise measured
to the passband appropriate to the data rate of interest.
In order to measure the noise the modulation to the DUT shall be turned off.

A.4.3 Component descriptions


Test Cable: The test cable and detector combination must be configured for a single dominate reflection with an optical return loss of 12dB. (The Optical return loss may be determined by the method of FOTP-107) If multiple lengths of cable are required to complete the test setup they should be
joined with splices or connectors having return losses in excess of 30 dB. The length of the test cable is not critical but should be in excess of 2 m.

96

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

Polarization Rotator: The polarization rotator shall be capable of transforming an arbitrary orientation elliptically polarized wave into a fixed orientation linearly polarized wave. A polarization rotator
consisting of two quarter wave retarders has the necessary flexibility.
O/E converter (and amplifier): The O/E converter may be of any type which is sensitive to the
wavelength range of interest. The frequency response of the O/E converter shall be higher than the
cut-off frequency of the low pass filter.
If necessary, the noise may be amplified to a level consistent with accurate measurement by the
power meter.

Filter: The low pass filter shall have a 3 dB bandwidth of approximately 75% of the bit rate. Recommended values are shown in table A.1. The total filter bandwidth used in the RIN calculation shall
take the low frequency cut-off of the d.c. blocking capacitor into consideration. The low frequency
cutoff is recommended to be <1 MHz.
Table A.1 Filter 3 dB point
Bit rate
1,0625 GBd
2,125 GBd
4,250 GBd

Filter 3dB point


800 MHz
1 600 MHz
3 200 MHZ

The filter should be placed in the circuit as the last component before the power meter so that any
high frequency noise components generated by the detector/amplifier are eliminated. If the power
meter used has a very wide bandwidth care should be taken in the filter selection to ensure that the
filter does not lose its rejection at extremely high frequencies.

Power Meter: The power meter should be an RF type designed to be used in a 50 coaxial system.
The meter shall be capable of being zeroed in the absence of input optical power to remove any residual noise from the detector or its attendant amplifier, if used.
A.4.4

Test Procedure

a) Connect and turn on the test equipment. Allow the equipment to stabilize for the manufacturers
recommended warm up time.
b) With the DUT disconnected zero the power meter to remove the contribution of any noise power from the detector and amplifier, if used.
c) Connect the DUT, turn on the laser, and ensure that the laser is not modulated.
d) Operate the polarization rotator while observing the power meter output to maximize the noise
read by the power meter. Note the maximum power, PN.
e) Turn on the modulation to the laser and note the power measurement, PM.
f)

Calculate RIN from the observed detector current and electrical noise by use of the equation:

Equation 5 Relative intensity noise

RIN12 (OMA) = 10 log [PN/(BW*PM)] (dB/Hz)


Where:
RIN12 (OMA)

= Relative Intensity Noise referred to optical modulation amplitude

97

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

PN

= Electrical noise power in Watts with modulation off

PM

= Electrical noise power in Watts with modulation on

BW

= Low pass bandwidth of filter - high pass bandwidth of DC blocking capacitor


[noise bandwidth of the measuring system (Hz)].

A.5

Optical modulation amplitude (OMA) test procedure

The recommended technique for measuring optical modulation amplitude requires test equipment
with the following minimum requirements:
a)

An oscilloscope with 500 MHz bandwidth (minimum)

b)

A signal generator capable of supplying a 100 MHz square wave with rise and fall characteristics compliant with FC-PI transmitter requirements.

c)

Optical to electrical converter with 500 MHz minimum bandwidth. The O/E converter shall be
calibrated at the appropriate wavelength for the transmitter under test.

d)

A 4th order Bessel Thompson filter with a 3 dB bandwidth of 0.75 Baudrate (optional).

While supplying the optical transmitter with 100 MHz square wave, use the following procedure to
measure optical modulation amplitude.
a) Configure the test equipment as illustrated in Figure B.1 such that the O/E converter is used as
a front end for the oscilloscope input electrical channel.
b) With a valid waveform displayed on the oscilloscope, place the first cursor at the mean voltage
level of the logic 1 as defined over the center 20% of the time interval which is in the high
state. (See figure A.4)
c) Place the second cursor on the mean voltage level of the logic 0 as defined over the center
20% of the time interval which the laser is in the low state.
d) Measure and record the voltage difference between the two cursors.
e) Calculate the OMA by multiplying the voltage difference by the conversion gain of the O/E converter at the wavelength of the laser source.

Signal
Generator

Optical
Transceiver

O/E
Converter

Oscilloscope
Bessel-Thompson
Filter
(optional)

Figure A.3 Optical modulation amplitude test equipment configuration

98

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

M e a su re m e n t W in d o w s

V o lta g e
D iffe re n tia l

4 0%

4 0%

40 %

4 0%

Figure A.4 Optical modulation amplitude waveform measurement

An alternative method of measurement is to measure the average optical power A (in mW) and the
extinction ratio E (absolute ratio NOT dB).
The OMA = 2A((E-1)/(E+1))

A.6 Optical receiver stress test


Testing of optical receivers for conformance to the stessed receiver power penalty requirement shall
use a signal at R (see figure A.6) conforming to the requirements described in figure A.5. The receiver stress-test pattern is recomended to be CRPAT as described in the MJS technical report
(ref. 42 on page 17) and is conditioned by applying deterministic jitter (DJ) and intersymbol interference (ISI). The conditioned signal is shown schematically in figure A.5. The horizontal eye closure as
defined in figure A.5, shall be no less than 0,085UI. The vertical eye closure penalty shall fall within

99

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

the ranges specified in table 6 for LW or table 11 on page 53 for SW 50m or table 12 on page 54 for
SW 62,5m. The DJ cannot be added with a simple phase modulation.
Average Optical Power (not necessarily at eye crossing)

Vertical
Eye
Opening
with
ISI (AO)

Nominal
Amplitude
without
ISI (AN)

Horizontal Eye Closure


Measured at Average Optical Power

Figure A.5 Required characteristics of the conformance test signal at R


The vertical eye closure penalty is given by:

A
Vertical eye closure penalty [dB] = 10 log ------OAN
where, AO is the amplitude of the eye opening and AN is the normal amplitude without ISI, as measured in figure A.5.
Figure A.6 shows the recommended test set up for producing the stressed receive conformance test
signal at R. The coaxial cable is adjusted in length to produce the correct DJ. Since the coaxial cable can produce the incorrect ISI, a limiting amplifier is used to restore fast rise and fall times. A
Bessel-Thompson filter is selected to produce the minimum ISI induced eye closure as specified per
table 6 on page 46 for LW or table 11 on page 53 for SW 50 m or table 12 on page 54 for SW
62,5m. This conditioned signal is used to drive a high bandwidth linearly modulated laser source.
The vertical and horizontal eye closures to be used for receiver conformance testing are verified using a fast photodetector and amplifier. The bandwidth of the photodetector shall be at least 2 x the
nominal Baud in GHz and be coupled through a fourth-order Bessel Thompson filter at 1,5 x the nom-

100

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

inal Baud to the oscilloscope input. Special care should be taken to ensure that all the light from the
fiber is collected by the fast photodetector and that there is negligible mode selective loss.
Serial
Bit Stream
Generator
Limiting
Amplifier

4th Order
BT Filter
Linear
Laser
Source

Coaxial
Cable

Receiver
under
test

Optical
Attenuator

Figure A.6 Apparatus for generating stressed receive conformance test signal at R

A.7 Measurement of the receiver electrical upper cutoff frequencies


The measurement of the receiver 3 dB and 10 dB electrical upper cutoff frequencies shall be performed using the test setup shown in figure A.7. An RF signal is added asynchronously to the data
stream, consisting of the CRPAT character stream, which is used to modulate the laser. The laser
and modulator frequency response must be calibrated to assure that an accurate measurement can
be made. The measurements use the following steps.
a) With no applied RF modulation, connect the laser output to the receiver under test through an
optical attenuator and set the optical power to a level between the stressed receiver sensitivity
and the receiver OMA, min.
b) Locate the center of the eye with the BERT. Turn on the RF modulation while maintaining the
same average optical power.
c) At all tested frequencies, measure the necessary RF modulation amplitude (in dBm) required to
achieve a constant BER (e.g. 10-6).
d) The receiver upper cutoff frequency is calculated by normalizing the measured response from
step c to the frequency response of the mesurement system.
e) The receiver 3 dB electrical upper cutoff frequency is that frequency where the corrected RF
modulation amplitude increases by 3 dB (electrical). The receiver 10 dB electrical upper cutoff
frequency is that frequency where the corrected RF modulation amplitude increases by 10 dB
(electrical). Care should be taken to convert to electrical dB and to correctly compensate for the
frequency response of the mesurement system.
RF signal
generator

RF power
combiner

MMF
Laser

Optical attenuator

Pattern
generator
Clock

DUT

BERT

Figure A.7 Test setup for receiver bandwidth measurement

101

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

102

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

Annex B
Electrical interface example (informative)
This annex describes an example implementation of the electrical interface for an optoelectronics
module to meet the requirements of the Fibre Channel physical interface. This example follows the
Fibre Channel-High Speed Parallel Interface (FC-HSPI), T11.2 Project 1343-DT. Individual implementers may place all or part of these functions in a product, or provide features in excess of this set
to accomplish additional system functions or as an aid to testing.
Individual products may not have all of the interfaces exposed. Any unexposed interface is under no
obligation to conform to this implementation. Conformance to this implementation is not required for
Fibre Channel compliance. Fibre Channel compliance is obtained by conformance to the main body
of this standard for exposed interfaces.
A block diagram of the modules for the example is shown in figure C.1. The example includes the
majority of the function of the FC-0 layer.
Differing communications media will require differing controls. For this reason, this implementation is
limited to consideration of the data interface and those control functions which will be common over
all media. Therefore, the block labeled "Link Control" (and its related signals Link_Control and
Link_Status) in figure B.1 will not be described for the implementation.

103

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

RX_LOS
VREFR
+/- Rcv_Data

Data
Recovery

+/- Retimed_Data

Media
Signal
In
Receiver

Serial to
Parallel
(with
Character
Align)

Rx[0:9]
RBC[0:1]

+/- Retimed_Clock

Receive
PLL

Comma
Detect

COM_DET
EN_CDET
RX_RATE
VREFT
EWRAP

Transmit
PLL

+/-Loopback

Transmitter

+/- Trans_Data

Media
Signal
Out

Parallel
to
Serial

Link
Control

REFCLK
TX_RATE

Tx[0:9]
TBC
Link_Control
Link_Status

Figure B.1 Fibre channel electrical interface example block diagram

B.1 Communications levels


Two communications levels are employed in this example implementation. High speed encoded
clock and data signals are implemented in differential, positive ECL. Lower speed signals associated
with parallel data transfers and function controls are implemented using SSTL_2-compatible voltage
levels.

B.1.1 PECL
The high speed encoded clock and data signals are implemented in differential PECL. The signal
swings are shown in figure B.2 referenced to the most positive voltage (Vpos) driving the PECL interface circuits. This voltage typically is 3,3 V in the case of low-voltage positive ECL (LVPECL). These
outputs should be capable of driving 50 transmission lines terminated in 50 to 2,0 V below the

104

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

reference level. The drivers and receivers are intended to operate only within the package and are
not required to have the electrostatic discharge protection required for driving box to box cables.
MPUL Vref
-0,88V
-0,88
V
MPUL
Vref
-0,88V

MPUL
-0,88V
-0,88
V
MPULVref
Vref
-0,88

LPUL Vref
-1,03V
-1,03
V
LPUL
Vref
-1,03V

LPUL
-1,17V
-1,17
V
LPULVref
Vref
-1,17

MPDL
MPDL
Vref
Vref-1,63V
-1,63
-1,63V
V
MPDL
Vref

MPDL
MPDL
Vref
Vref-1,48V
-1,48
-1,48V
V
MPDL
Vref

LPDL
LPDL
Vref
Vref-1,81V
-1,81
-1,81V
V
LPDL
Vref

LPDL
LPDL
Vrev
Vrev-1,81V
-1,81
-1,81V
V
LPDL
Vrev

OUTPUT
OUTPUT LEVELS
LEVELS

INPUT
INPUT LEVELS
LEVELS

Figure B.2 PECL communication levels


B.1.2

SSTL_2

The parallel communications and control lines are implemented with SSTL_2 compatible voltage
swings as shown in figure B.3 in order to provide compatibility with typical host system interfaces.
Due to the relatively high speeds of the signals, termination for the driver circuits as suggested by the
SSTL_2 standard is recommended to minimize ringing. Valid SSTL_2 voltage levels are specified relative to the transmitter or receiver reference level ( Vref[T|R] ). The allowed range for Vref is 1,15 V
to 1,35 V. The complete SSTL_2 specification is available through the JEDEC web page at http://www.jedec.org/.
Vcc ++ 0.30V
0.30 V
MPUL Vcc

MPUL Vcc
Vcc ++ 0,30V
0,30 V

Vref[T|R]
+ 0,38 V
LPUL
1,63V

Vref[T|R]
+ 0,35 V
LPUL 1,60V

Vref[T|R]
- 0,38
V
MPDL
0,87V

Vref[T|R]
- 0,35
V
MPDL
0,90V

LPDL
V
LPDL -0.30
-0.30V

LPDLLPDL
-0,30-0,30V
V

OUTPUT
OUTPUT LEVELS
LEVELS

INPUT
INPUT LEVELS
LEVELS

Figure B.3 SSTL_2 compatible communication levels

B.2 Serial interfaces


All serial interfaces use differential ECL communication levels. They are indicated with a +/- prefix
on signals in figure B.1.

B.2.1

Transmit serial interface

The transmit serial interface communicates the data from the serializer to the communications media.
(It corresponds to the FC-0_Data.Request primitive of the FC-0 Service Interface.)

105

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

B.2.2 Receiver serial interface


The receive serial interface communicates the serial received data (+/-Rcv_Data) from the media interface circuits to the clock extraction and retiming circuits.

B.2.3 Receiver retimed clock and data serial interface


The receiver recovered data carries the recovered data (+/-Recovered_Data) and recovered
clock(+/-Recovered_Clock) from the clock recovery circuits to the deserializer. (The serial +/Recovered_Data lines are an implementation of the FC-PI_Data.Indication primitive of the FC-PI service interface.)
The serial +/-Recovered_Clock lines carry the clock signal recovered from the Receive Serial Interface to the deserializer. (These lines are the implementation of the FC-PI_Clock_Out.Indication
primitive of the FC-PI service interface.)
The relative timing between the +/-Recovered_Data and the +/-Recovered_Clock is shown in figure
B.4. TBit is the reciprocal of the data rate. Valid data for +/-Recovered_Data is indicated by the eye
mask. For this example, +/-Recovered_Data is valid 0,25 TBit before and 0,25 TBit after the falling
edge of +Recovered_Clock.
TBit

+/- Retimed_Clock

0,25 TBit

0,25 TBit

+/- Retimed_Data

Figure B.4 Retimed interface signal timing

B.3 Parallel interfaces


B.3.1 Voltage levels
The parallel interfaces are implemented using SSTL_2 compatible voltage levels. Exceptions to this
are VREFT and VREFR, which are DC levels, and REFCLK[0:1], which is PECL.

B.3.2 Bus data rate


The example allows for transmit and receive bus data transfers of 10 bits per data transfer of either
106,25 MBd or 212,5 MBd. An internal 10 bit parallel data transfer rate of 106,25 MBd corresponds
to an external serial data transfer rate of 1 062,5 GBaud and an internal 10 bit parallel data transfer
rate of 212,5 MBd corresponds to an external serial data transfer rate of 2 125 GBaud. The Tx[0:9]
bus rate is controlled by TX_RATE and the Rx[0:9] bus rate is controlled by RX_RATE.

B.3.3 Transmit parallel interface


Data transfers on the Tx[0:9] bus to the electrical interface are timed by the host system supplied
Transmit Byte Clock (TBC). The frequency of the TBC is 106,25 MHz for both 106,25 MBd and
212,5 MBd data transfer rates. Data at the 106,25 MBd rate is timed from the falling edge of TBC.
106

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

The transmit parallel interface timings for the 106,25 MBd rate are shown in figure B.5. For the
106,25 MBd rate, Tx[0:9] set-up and hold time to the falling edge of TBC are each 1,4 nsec.
VREFT+0,35V
VREFT

TBC

VREFT+0,35V
tSETUP = 1,4 nsec

tHOLD = 1,4 nsec


VREFT+0,35V

Tx[0:9]
VREFT+0,35V

Figure B.5 Transmit parallel interface timings: 106,25 MBd


Data at the 212,5 MBd rate is timed from both clock edges. This clocking scheme is frequently referred to as double data rate (DDR). At this rate, Tx[0:9] and TBC are nominally driven at the same
time. All of these signals attain valid SSTL_2 levels within the transition time limit, tTXCT, of 1,88
nsec. All of the signals are have a minimum valid time, tVALID, of 1,4 nsec. Timings for the
212,5 MBd rate are shown in figure B.6.
VREFT+0,35V
VREFT

TBC

VREFT-0,35V
tVALID = 1,4 nsec
VREFT+0,35V

Tx[0:9]
VREFT-0,35V
tTXCT = 1,4 nsec

Figure B.6 Transmit parallel interface timings: 212,5 MBd


B.3.3.1

Tx[0:9]

Tx[0:9] is the 10 bit parallel transmit data presented to the electrical interface for serialization and
transmission. The order that bits are transmitted in is Tx[0] first, followed by Tx[1] through Tx[9].

B.3.3.2

TBC

TBC is the transmit byte clock which operates at 106,25 MHz independent of the transmit interface
data rate. TBC is used to read data into the electrical interface for transmission. TBC is at the same
frequency as REFCLK[0:1] and is never skewed more than one quarter clock cycle from it. The frequency tolerance for TBC is +/- 100 ppm.

B.3.3.3

TX_RATE

TX_RATE is the speed selector for data transmission for the electrical interface. When TX_RATE is
low the interface will transmit data at 1 062,5 MBaud. When TX_RATE is high the interface will transmit data at 2 125 MBaud.

107

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

B.3.3.4

VREFT

VREFT is the reference voltage for Tx[0:9], TBC, TX_RATE, RX_RATE, EWRAP, and EN_CDET.
The electrical interface interprets these signals as logical 1 when their voltages are greater than
VREFT. The interface interprets these signals as logical 0 when their values are less than VREFT.

B.3.4 Receive parallel interface


Data transfers on the Rx[0:9] bus from the electrical interface are timed by the Receive Byte Clock
(RBC[0:1]). The frequency of the RBC[0:1] is 53,125 MHz for 106,25 MBd output data rates (for
1 062,5 MBaud serial data input) and 106,25 MHz for 212,5 MBd rates (for 2 125 MBaud serial data
rates). For both frequencies, RBC[0] is delayed by one half clock cycle from RBC[1]. Duty cycle for
RBC[0:1] is between 40% and 60%. Since the data output rate is twice the frequency of the clocks,
setup time and hold time specifications are defined relative to the edge that is rising during the valid
data period. For the 106,25 MBd Rx[0:9] rate, setup time is 3,0 nsec. and hold time is 1,5 nsec. For
the 212,5 MBd Rx[0:9] rate, setup time is 1,4 nsec. and hold time is 1,4 nsec. These specifications
refer to COM_DET as well as to Rx[0:9]. These timing relationships are illustrated in figure B.7 for
the 106,25 MBd Rx[0:9] rate and in figure C-8?? for the 212,5 MBd Rx[0:9] rate.
tCYCLE: 18.28 to 19.41 ns

RBC[1]

VREFR

RBC[0]

VREFR

tA-B

tSETUP
3,0 ns
VREFT+0,38V
Comma
Character

Rx[0:9]

Valid
Data
VREFT-0,38V
tHOLD
1,5 ns
VREFT+0,38V

COM_DET
VREFT-0,38V

Figure B.7 Receive parallel interface timings: 106,25 MBd

B.3.4.1

Rx[0:9]

Rx[0:9] is the 10 bit parallel received data, driven by the electrical interface to the host system. The
order that bits are received in is Rx[0] first, followed by Rx[1] through Rx[9].

B.3.4.2

RBC[0:1]

RBC[0] and RBC[1] are the two receive byte clocks provided by the electrical interface for the host to
clock RX[0:9] data. The frequency of each RBC is 53,125 MHz for the 106,25 MBd data transfer rate
and 106,25 MHz for the 212,5 MBd rate. RBC[0] is exactly one half clock cycle delayed from RBC[1].
During byte or word alignment, RBC[0:1] pulses may be extended beyond their nominal length, but
they are not truncated or slivered less than their nominal length.
108

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

The tA-B specification provides the allowed delay range from RBC[0] to RBC[1]. This is 8,9 to 9,9
nsec. for the 106,25 MBd Rx[0:9] transfer rate and 4,5 to 4,9 nsec. for the 212,5 MBd Rx[0:9] MHz
Rx[0:9] transfer rate.

B.3.4.3

COM_DET

COM_DET indicates that the electrical interface has detected a comma sequence and that byte 0 of
word 0 associated with the current positive edge of RBC[1] contains a comma character. In order to
provide this function, the electrical interface many delete one or more characters if RBC[1] is out of
phase with the received comma sequence. This allows RBC[1] to be stretched an additional one
byte (byte slip) so that on the next received comma sequence RBC[1] will be in phase.

B.3.4.4

EN_CDET

EN_CDET enables the electrical interface to perform the byte alignment function after receiving the
comma sequence. When EN_CDET is asserted (high) the byte alignment function is operational.

B.3.4.5

RX_RATE

RX_RATE is the speed selector for reception by the electrical interface. When RX_RATE is low the
interface will receive data at 1 062,5 MBaud. When TX_RATE is high the interface will receive data
at 2 125 MBaud.

B.3.4.6

RX_LOS

RX_LOS is the receiver loss-of-signal indicator. When the amplitude of the incoming high-speed serial data is too low for that data to be considered valid, RX_LOS is set to a logical 1 (high).

B.3.4.7

VREFR

VREFR is the reference voltage for RX[0:9], RBC[0:1], COM_DET, and RX_LOS. These signals are
interpreted as a logical 1 if their voltage is above VREFR, and as a logical 0 if their voltage is below
VREFR.

B.4 REFCLK[0:1]
REFCLK[0:1] is the differential 106,25 MHz transmit PLL reference clock for generation of the
1 062,5 or 2 125 MHz bit rate clocks used for serial data transmission. The receive PLL automatically uses REFCLK[0:1] as a reference at power-up or in the absence of an input data stream. The frequency tolerance for this clock shall be +/- 100 ppm. The active crossing for REFCLK[0] and
REFCLK[1] is when REFCLK[1] rises and REFCLK[0] falls. This crossing must have low jitter. (This
line performs the function of the FC-PI_Clock_Reference.Request primitive of the FC-PI Service Interface.)

B.5 Support functions


B.5.1

Acquisition of receiver bit synchronization

The receive interface bit synchronization in this example begins at power-up of the interface once the
REFCLK input has stabilized. At that point the receive PLL acquires lock to the REFCLK frequency
within 500 usec. Once a valid input signal is received, the receive PLL will lock to that signal within
2500 bits.

109

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

Should synchronization be lost while the PLL is operating near to the input data frequency, the clock
recovery will take less than 2 500 bits to reacquire synchronization. This may occur as a result of a
phase jump in the incoming data or activation of the loopback function.
This bit synchronization activity results in establishing the frequency and timing of +/Recovered_Clock which in turn drives the deserializer and hence the RBC[0:1]. In the event that the
incoming signal is lost the frequency of +/-Recovered_Clock and RBC[0:1]are limited be within the
range of 103,06 to 109,44 MHz. (The Lock_to_Reference line is the implementation of FCPI_Resync.Request primitive of the FC-PI service interface.)

B.5.2 Receive byte alignment


The electrical interface contains circuitry to provide character alignment. The circuitry will cause the
output to be aligned on any occurrence of an alignment pattern in the incoming bit stream. The alignment pattern may be either a K28.5 character or any positive disparity comma. The comma is the
first seven bit subset of a character composed of the pattern 0011111XXX.
When alignment occurs the comma character which triggered the alignment, and all subsequent data, will be presented in uncorrupted form on the Rx[0:9] lines. Pulses on the receive byte clocks,
RBC[0:1], may be extended, but are not truncated or slivered.
The occurrence of a character alignment is signaled by a pulse on the COM_DET line. Refer to section C.3.4 for the details of COM_DET timing. This line signals the host system that the presented
character is the first character of an ordered set as defined by FC-FS and that the previous clocks
may have been extended.
The alignment is enabled by holding the EN_CDET input high. This allows the character alignment to
be disabled for test purposes.

B.5.3 Loopback function


When the EWRAP input is a logic 1, the loopback function is enabled. In this operating mode the serial data stream from the transmitter is routed to the input of the data recovery block. After the time
required for bit and character synchronizations this data will be available on the receive data output
lines. During loopback the operation of the communications media is not defined. The loopback
function is defined at the FC-FS rather than the FC-PI level.

110

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

Annex C(informative)
Optical cable plant usage
The worst-case power budget and link penalties for the multimode cables specified in clause 6.2 on
page 52 are shown in table D.1. In some cases, it will be desirable to use an alternative multimode
cable plant to those described in clause 6.2. This may be due to the need for operation in locations
where alternative lower bandwidth cables are presently installed or new installations where higher
bandwidth cables have been installed. These fiber types have not been studied (note 2), nor is their
use provided in the main body of this document. Their cable plant usage is described in tables D.2
and D.3.

Table D.1 Multimode cable link power budget


Parameter

Unit

50mm MMF

62,5mm MMF

Note

Modal Bandwidth

MHz*km

500

200

Data rate

MB/s

100

200

400

100

200

400

Operating
distance

2-500

2-300

2-150

2-300

2-150

2-70

Link power
budget

dB

Intersymbol
interference

dB

1.85

2.26

2.71

3.14

3.09

3.21

Additional link
penalties

dB

1.27

0.96

1.03

0.86

0.71

0.78

Channel insertion
loss

dB

3.85

2.62

2.06

3.00

2.10

1.78

Unallocated link
margin

dB

0.03

0.16

0.20

0.00

0.10

0.23

Table D.2 Alternate (lower bandwidth) multimode cable link power budget
Parameter
Modal Bandwidth
Data rate

Unit

50mm MMF

62,5mm MMF

Note

MHz*km

400

160

MB/s

100

200

400

100

200

400

2-450

2-260

2-130

2-250

2-120

2-55

Stressed receiver
sensitivity

MW

0.058

0.100

0.141

0.071

0.112

0.150

3, 5

Stressed receiver ISI test

dB

1.2

1.58

2.02

2.38

2.13

2.14

Link power budget

dB

Intersymbol interference

dB

2.11

2.51

2.97

3.33

3.08

3.12

Operating distance

Additional link penalties

dB

1.18

0.91

0.98

0.87

0.70

0.78

Channel insertion loss

dB

3.61

2.47

1.99

2.76

1.98

1.72

Unallocated link margin

dB

0.10

0.11

0.06

0.04

0.24

0.38

6
7

111

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

Table D.3 Alternate (higher bandwidth) multimode cable link power budget
Parameter
Modal Bandwidth
Data rate

Unit

50m MMF

Note

MHz*km

2200

1, 2

MB/s

100

200

400

Operating distance

2-860

2-500

2-270

Wavelength

nm

840-860

840-860

840-860

RMS spectral width

nm

0.85

0.85

0.85

Stressed receiver sensitivity

mW

0.047

0.083

0.126

3, 5

Stressed receiver ISI test

dB

0.24

0.33

0.75

Link power budget

dB

Intersymbol interference

dB

0.97

1.09

1.61

Additional link penalties

dB

1.36

1.51

1.83

Channel insertion loss

dB

4.62

3.31

2.48

Unallocated link margin

dB

0.05

0.09

0.08

3,8

6
7

Notes:
1

Modal bandwidth at 850 nm.

In order to achieve this bandwidth certain launch conditions are required. This bandwidth is currently under
study in other Standards bodies. Their future standardization may affect distance and link penalties, specified in this table; or other requirements.

See clause 6.2 on page 52. for other specifications.

The reduction in the spectral width specifications reflects the capability of sources which meet the reduced
center wavelength range.

Optical modulation amplitude values are peak-to-peak. See annex A.5

Link penalties are used for link budget calculations. They are not requirements and are not meant to be
tested. The link penalties were calculated using the methodologies in reference [43].

The unallocated link margin may be combined with the channel insertion loss to meet the measured channel insertion loss but not to increase the operating distance.

It is expected that the operating distance for 400 MB/s will increse to at least 300 m with improvements intransmitter or relaxiation of laser safety standards.

112

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

Annex D(informative)
Optical Receptacle Requirements

D.1 Combined Connector Mechanical-Optical Requirements


Connector testing definitions and conditions

Table E.1 Plug/Receptacle Mechanical-Optical Requirements


Tests

Receptacle
Recommended
test method

Value
Axial pull force
(latch retention
force)
Insertion /
withdrawal force
Single plug
repeatability
Cross plug
repeatability
Off axis (rotational)
pull
Cable / connector
pull strength (cable
to connector
retention)
InsertionDecouple cycles

S/I

Value

Plug
Recommended
test method

S/I

90N min.

.3

90N min.

.7

10N min.

.4

80N max.

.8

.5

.6

Not
applicable
Not
applicable

Not
applicable

20N min.

.9

Not
applicable

90N min.

.10

250 min.

250 min.

NOTE S/I=Standard vs. Informative

The term "failure" shall be defined as

1. Increase in attenuation of 1,0 dB or a decrease in return loss of 5 dB as specified per test.


2. Mechanical damage defined as splitting, cracking, pitting, galling or deformation observable under 10X magnification unless otherwise stated for the Ferrule, Cable or Connector
Body.
3. Functional dimensions non-conforming to print requirements after stress.
The application of a stimulus such as a force or environmental condition shall be applied once to
demonstrate compliance with the requirement unless otherwise stated. The following tolerances
shall apply to all connector tests:

Table E.2 Connector test tolerances.


Length
Angles
Rates
Weights

+ 10%
+ 3
+ 10%
+ 10%

Before each of the following tests are conducted, clean the ends of the fibre optic connectors.
Unless otherwise stated, the Duplex receptacle shall be mounted via the mounting slots.
113

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

When Duplex Cable Assemblies are inserted in the receptacle, they shall be cantilevered free of any
support.

D.2 Receptacle axial pull test


Purpose: To ensure the receptacle is able to withstand an axial applied plug pull load without degrading optical performance.
Test method: FOTP-6 is the recommended test method. The plug must be completely latched before the start of testing.

D.3 Receptacle insertion/withdrawal force test


Purpose: To ensure the receptacle is designed to allow for easy insertion of the plug. The test would
check the stiffness of the SC clips and ferrule/bore fit.
Test method: FOTP-187 is the recommended test method.

D.4 Receptacle optical repeatability test


Purpose: Fibre to optical source alignment measurement.
Test method: FOTP-34 is the recommended test method for receptacles.
A minimum of 25 single plug insertions should be repeated on a single receptacle or coupler. The
maximum variation between any two insertions should meet the requirements stated in Plug/Receptacle Mechanical-Optical Requirements.

D.5 Receptacle optical cross plug repeatability test


Purpose: Fibre to optical source alignment measurement.
Test method: FOTP-34 is the recommended test method for receptacles.
A minimum of 25 different plug insertions should be performed on a single receptacle. The maximum
variation between any two insertions should meet the requirements stated in Plug/Receptacle Mechanical-Optical Requirements.

D.6 Plug axial pull test


Purpose: To ensure minimum plug to receptacle retention force with an axial applied load to the cable. Also tests cable's strain relief. This test is not a breakage test, cable functionality is required
during the test.
Test method: FOTP-6 is the recommended test method. The plug must be completely latched before the start of testing.

D.7 Plug insertion/withdrawal force test


Purpose: The true measure of ferrule float and housing to housing compliance. Testing would require gages to check the plug's ability to insert into bores at the four corners of the receptacle tolerance limits.
Test method: FOTP-187 is the recommended test method. The couplers/adapters used for this
evaluation should ideally represent the high end of geometric tolerance range in terms of bore position and alignment.

D.8 Plug off axis pull test


Purpose: Ensures that cables can be dress in any direction without loss of optical performance.
114

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

Test method: IEC 874-1, subclause 28.7.4 is the recommended test method.

D.9 Cable/ plug pull strength


Purpose: Test integrity of the fibre to connector strain relief.
Test method: FOTP-6 is the recommended test method. The plug must be secured before the start
of testing.

115

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

116

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

Annex E(normative)
Tx-Off and Rx-Loss of Signal detection
This annex extends the optical and electrical interface specifications of Clauses 6 and 9, in the areas
of transmitter-off behavior and the (optional) receiver loss-of-signal function. It gives the background, scope, and qualitative and quantitative requirements for Tx-off and Rx-LOS in FC physical interfaces. See also Annex F (normative) Service Interface on page 119.

E.1 Background
There are cases where a Fibre Channel device is connected to another device whose transmitter is
not operational, or is connected to a transmission medium with nothing on the far end. In these cases, the first device must not react as if a normal TxRx connection existed. For example, an arbitrated-loop hub must keep those ports bypassed.
The most problematic case is that of a normal-strength encoded signal from a remote device which is
not responding to its serial input, e.g. during its power-on selftest. That case is prohibited by FC-AL2, which requires that a ports transmitter shall be disabled when the port cannot participate in normal
protocols.
FC-PI gives the name Tx-Off to the state of a disabled optical or electrical transmitter, and specifies
the maximum signal amplitude that may be launched into the transmission medium. The Tx-Off requirement exists to enable, or facilitate, an attached FC device to reject the link.
Tx-Off by itself is not a universally sufficient solution, because of the extreme sensitivity of typical receivers. An optical receiver, even with no light, generates noise voltage in which a de-serializer will
detect commas, K28.5s, and even LIPs with predictable frequency. Erroneous "detection" of a valid
pattern is even more likely with an electrical receiver, given near-end crosstalk from the local transmitter (NEXT), and pattern-rate deterministic noise voltage from a remote transmitter that is "Off".
Fortunately, it is generally practical to make a receiver with an amplitude-sensitive signal detect function, known in FC-PI by the complementary name Rx-LOS (Receiver Loss of Signal). In order to be
useful, this must reliably discriminate between the smallest valid input signal and the largest invalid
input signal.

E.2 Scope
The Rx-LOS function is optional in FC-PI. Many FC devices dont need it. This group includes some
devices with only one port, whose behavior is "dont care" when standing alone. It also includes devices which can do without it, because they conduct an elaborate and hard-to-fool exchange with the
remote device. But many Fibre Channel devices do require a robust Rx-LOS function. They include
autonomous port-bypass circuits, e.g. hub ports, whose relatively simple valid-pattern tests can be
fooled by crosstalk and Tx-Off leakage waveforms.
The Tx-Off functional requirement is mandatory for all ports supporting FC-AL-2, and any other FC
device that could disrupt a system by transmitting without properly responding to the received signal.
Likewise, the Tx-Off amplitude limits given in FC-PI are mandatory for all FC-AL-2 ports, and other
devices that are expected to work with Rx-LOS ports.
Interoperable Rx-LOS implementations require generally accepted bounds on the signal detect
threshold. The lower bound depends on the maximum Tx-Off level. In addition, for electrical links, it
depends on the local transmitter output and the NEXT ratio of the attached cable plant. Unfortunately, NEXT limits and methods of measurement are outside the scope of this FC-PI release. Therefore,
Rx-LOS detection thresholds must be given as expressions in which NEXT is a variable.

117

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

E.3 Functional and Timing Specifications


Component specifications are outside the scope of FC-PI. The requirements given here apply to the
transmission media interface and an (implied) service interface between the FC-PI and FC-FS layers.

E.3.1

Tx_Off

The Tx_Off (disabled) state is mandatory in some kinds of FC port, and optional in others. The mandatory group includes, among others, all ports supporting FC-AL-2. Where implemented, Tx_Off
control timing shall meet the requirements in the following table.

Table G.1 Tx-Off timing


Turn-off time

t_off

max 10 s

Assertion of Disable to fall of output amplitude below the


specified maximum Tx-Off level. During this period, the
TxRx connection BER and the far end Rx-LOS
response are unspecified.

Turn-on time

t_on

max 1 ms

Negation of Disable to rise of output amplitude above


the specified minimum valid level in the link budget.
During this period, the TxRx connection BER and the far
end Rx-LOS response are unspecified.

E.3.2

Rx_LOS

The receiver of an FC device may implement an Rx_LOS function, which continuously generates an
Rx_LOS signal in response to the amplitude of the incoming serial data. Rx_LOS is intended to indicate the absence of a deliberate input signal.
Assertion of Rx_LOS shall imply that the amplitude of incoming serial data is less than the minimum
level allowed by the link budget. This typically indicates a disconnected or broken cable, or a transmitter at the far end that is disabled, broken, or powered off. The converse is not necessarily true. A
poor quality link may provide enough signal for Rx_LOS to remain negated, even though the signal
level is noncompliant and the BER objective is not met.
Rx_LOS shall not depend on, or imply anything about, the input data format or encoding.
Rx_LOS may squelch the received serial and/or parallel data stream.
Rx_LOS response time shall comply with the following table..

Table G.2 Rx-LOS timing


Assert delay

t_los_on

max 100
s

From fall of input signal below LOS detection threshold.


The TxRx connection may become noncompliant before
that threshold is reached.

Negate delay

t_los_off

max 100
s

From rise of input signal above LOS detection threshold.


The TxRx connection may remain noncompliant after
that threshold is reached.

The signal detection circuitry shall be designed such that the Rx_LOS output does not rapidly change
state with small variations in received power. Hysteresis and time averaging are two possible approaches to this requirement.

118

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

E.4 Optical Tx_Off and Rx_LOS Signal Levels


The launched power from an optical transmitter in the Tx_Off state shall not exceed -35 dBm (ave).
That limit applies to both shortwave and longwave, for all speed variants in FC-PI.
The value of Rx_LOS, where implemented, shall be generated acording to the following table:

Table G.3 Optical Rx_LOS Detection Thresholds


Receive Conditions

Rx-LOS value

Input_optical_power < -31 dBm (ave)

Asserted

Input_optical_power > specified receiver sensitivity


AND
Modulation parameters comply with FC-PI limits

Negated

All other conditions

Unspecified

This standard is designed to permit various detector implementations, including those responding to
average optical power as well as those responding to the 8b/10b modulation amplitude.

E.5 Electrical Tx_Off Signal Levels


The output voltage of an electrical transmitter in the Off state shall not exceed the value specified in
table 27 on page 72.
The Tx_Off voltage limit applies to the gamma-T compliance point, and is not defined for any other
compliance point. It includes the worst-case effect of any crosstalk within the FC device from the adjacent receiver path. For compliance testing, Tx_Off voltage should be measured while a maximum
strength, minimum risetime 8b/10b signal is applied to the gamma-R point of the same port.

E.6 Electrical Rx_LOS Signal Levels


The value of Rx_LOS, where implemented, shall be generated according to the following table:

Table G.4 Electrical Rx_LOS Detection Thresholds


Receive Conditions

Rx-LOS value

Vinput(receiver) < Rx_LOS threshold (see below)

Asserted

Vinput(receiver) > minimum differential sensitivity specified in table 26

Negated

All other conditions

Unspecified

The actual threshold of each receiver, below which Rx_LOS is asserted, shall be no less than the
sum of:

The maximum voltage coming from a remote transmitter in the Tx_Off state
The maximum NEXT voltage. This is the product of the local transmittter output voltage and the
maximum tolerable NEXT ratio of the cable plant, which may be a function of the local transmitter
risetime. This standard does not presently set limits on cable plant NEXT ratios.
Maximum voltage at the receiver input from other local sources of noise. This includes next sources between the alpha and gamma points.

119

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

E.7 Methods of Measurement for Electrical Rx_LOS Thresholds


(informative)
The stated bounds on Rx_LOS thresholds imply a significant tradeoff between process margins and
NEXT tolerance. For example, a relatively demanding NEXT bound of 3% would limit the total nondeliberate input voltage to less than 150 mV. The Rx_LOS threshold could vary from that level to almost 400 mV, a ratio of 2.7:1. To support a more conservative NEXT allowance of 7%, while the local transmitter is allowed to drive 2000 mV and the remote transmitter 70 mV, the minimum Rx_LOS
threshold is around 220 mV, allowing no more than 1.8:1 process variation.
In some cases, circuit design can control the effective Rx_LOS threshold voltage to tighter tolerances. But another, more broadly applicable approach promises to increase the margins substantially.
The key is to measure and add up worst-case noise voltage in a way that is not so conservative with
respect to the measurement of worst-case signal voltages. This issue is under investigation, and
quantitative details may be added in a future amendment or technical report.
The proposed experiment is to compare the thresholds of typical Rx-LOS circuits, measured with two
different stimulus waveforms (each variably attenuated). In one case the input is a normal NRZ data
signal, calibrated by scope measurement of its vertical eye opening. In the other case the input is a
"spiky" NEXT and/or Tx-Off waveform, calibrated by scope measurement of peak-to-peak voltage.
We expect that Rx-LOS threshold values measured with noise waveforms will be significantly higher
than those measured with data eyes. This would give system designers more margin in the tradeoff
between Rx-LOS threshold control and NEXT tolerance.
There is another argument saying that the upper bound on Rx-LOS threshold is not unreasonably
tight with respect to the lower. Data signals are measured by vertical eye opening, but LOS circuits
look at the rectified average or peak voltage. When noise is added to a data waveform it closes the
eye, but always increases the peak and the rectified average voltage. So in a system designed to tolerate a finite amount of noise (NEXT etc.), with minimum input the peak voltage will significantly exceed the vertical eye. One likely conclusion: "It is unlikely that practical limits on NEXT will be driven
by the need for manufacturable Rx-LOS detectors. The critical constraint is the effect of NEXT on eye
closure and link budget."

120

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

Annex F(informative)
SG optical connector requirements
Specification for type SG, FOCIS 7 Connector Interface Connector Set Components and Cable Assemblies, for Inside Building Wiring Applications

Fiber optic connector set classification:

Type:

Interface: SG
Configuration: PlugSocket
Coupling engagement:RJ style latch
Mating Face Limits of Tolerance: ANSI/TIA/EIA-604-7 (FOCIS 7)

Style:

Optical coupling: 8 angular contact


Fiber alignment: VGroove

Fiber Retention: as required


Cable Retention: as required

Arrangements: kit (socket), patch cord, distribution cable


Variants: Number of fibers, optical fiber type, fiber coating / buffer size, cable type,
cable length, hybrid patch cord connector type.
Climatic Category:

10/60/04 applicable to connector set components


0/50/04 applicable to specified indoor cables
40/60/04 applicable to specified outdoor cables

Outline drawing and maximum dimensions:

70 Ref.
45 Max.

58 Ref.
51 Max.

R 25 Min.
Plug
Socket
R 25 Min.
Figure H.1 Assembled connector set. type SG connector
Figure
1: Assembled Connector Set, Type SG Connector

121

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

F.1 General
The intent of this Specification is to enable end users and manufacturers to uniformly specify fiber optic connector set components and cable assemblies incorporating type SG Fiber Optic Connector Interface Standard, ANSI/TIA/EIA 6047 (FOCIS 7). Application of this specification is intended to
assure component interoperability, and to define recommended application performance for the
physical infrastructure required to support Fibre Channel Physical Interface Standard (FCPI).
This document has been formulated under the cognizance of NCITS Technical Committee T11, Device Level Interfaces.

F.1.1

Scope

Optical fiber connector set components and cable assemblies are specified that comply with ANSI/TIA/EIA 6047 (FOCIS 7), Fiber Optic Connector Intermateability Standard, Type SG.
It is the intent of this specification that full intermateability of connector set components will be realized on the basis that FOCIS 7 establishes the necessary parameters to ensure intermateability.
Connector sets from different sources are considered fully intermateable when connector parts from
one source will mate with complementary parts from other sources without mechanical interference,
while maintaining specified optical performance.
Appropriate applications for components specified by this Specification are fiber optic communications inter-connect, cross-connect, and distribution cabling located within and between buildings in a
campus environment. All in-service optical fibers are connectorized, all connector interfaces are located within building perimeter walls, and network distribution may extend up to and including connection to the communications outlet/optical port of desktop equipment.

F.1.1.1 Suitability for Environmental Conditions


Environmental hazards of intrabuilding interconnection locations are generally benign. ANSI/TIA/EIA475 defines this controlled environment as Environmental Category I and identifies minimum performance criteria. Relevant commercial building wiring standards ANSI/TIA/EIA568A and
ISO/IEC 11801 specify recommended climatic temperature extremes of 10 C to +60 C.
Interbuilding cable placement is also within the stated scope of ANSI/TIA/EIA568A. This application is conditionally supported with stipulation that all connector terminations are located inside building perimeter walls. Suitable applications of specified outside plant cables are limited to continuous
lengths of connectorized interbuilding cables.
Specification and qualification for outdoor placement and operation of passive interconnecting devices is not within the scope of this Specification.

F.1.1.2 Long Link Lengths


Connector set attenuation limits are not intended to also include the intrinsic attenuation present in
long length optical fiber links. To facilitate acceptance criteria of long length cable assemblies, the following procedure may be used: Calculate, from the actual cable length, the maximum allowable attenuation of the specified optical fiber type and operating wavelength. Deduct this allowable intrinsic
loss from the measured cable link attenuation, and report the resultant value for connector attenuation.

F.1.1.3 Quality Assurance


It is the responsibility of the manufacturer to establish quality assurance procedures that will ensure
the product satisfies the requirements of relevant specifications on a continuing basis. It is not intended that a complete testing program be carried out on every specified component or cable assembly.
When the user wishes to specify acceptance tests or other quality procedures, it is essential that
agreement be reached between the user and the manufacturer at the time of ordering.
122

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

F.1.2

Related Documents

NOTE Several referenced standards are in a concurrent process of revision or are pending publication, they
are indicated by Italics. Where provisions of an update is significant to this specification, the most current reference is provided with the intent it will supercede prior issues when published.

F.1.2.1 Normative References


[1] EIA/TIA-440-A: Fiber Optic Connector Terminology, January 1989.
[2]

EIA/TIA-455-1: FOTP 1A, Cable Flexing for Fiber Optic Interconnecting devices, Nov. 1988.

[3]

EIA/TIA-455-2: FOTP 2B, Impact Test Measurement for Fiber Optic Devices, Nov. 1990.

[4]

EIA/TIA-455-4: FOTP 4B, Fiber Optic Connector /Component Temperature Life, Sept. 1993.

[5]

EIA/TIA-455-5: FOTP 5B, Humidity Test Procedure for Fiber Optic Connecting Devices, July
1994.

[6]

EIA/TIA-455-6: FOTP 6B, Cable Retention Test Procedure for Fiber Optic Cable Interconnecting Devices, March 1992.

[7]

EIA/TIA-455-13: FOTP 13A, Visual and Mechanical Inspection of Fibers, Cables, Connectors,
and/or Other Fiber Optic Devices, 1995

[8]

EIA-455-21: FOTP 21A, Mating Durability for Fiber Optic Interconnecting Devices, Nov. 1988.

[9]

EIA-455-34: FOTP 34, Interconnection Device Insertion Loss Test, May 1985.

[10] EIA/TIA-455-107: FOTP 107, Return Loss for Fiber Optic components, Feb. 1989
[11] TIA/EIA-455-170: Cable Cutoff Wavelength of Single-Mode Fiber by Transmitted Power, November 1989
[12] EIA/TIA-455-171: FOTP 171, Attenuation by Substitution Measurement - for Short-Length Multimode Graded-Index and Single-Mode Optical Fiber Cable Assemblies, July 1987.
[13] EIA/TIA-455-185: FOTP 185, Strength of Coupling Mechanism for Fiber Optic Interconnecting
Devices, May 1991.
[14] EIA/TIA-455-188: FOTP 188, Low-Temperature Testing of Fiber Optic Components, Jan. 1992
[15] ANSI/TIA/EIA-604: Fiber Optic Connector Intermateability Standards (FOCIS), Nov. 1993
[16] ANSI/TIA/EIA-604-7: FOCIS7, Fiber Optic Connector Intermateability Standard Type SG,
1999.
[17] ANSI/TIA/EIA-604-3: FOCIS3, Fiber Optic Connector Intermateability Standard Type SC,
1997.
[18] ANSI/TIA/EIA-472CAAA, Detail Specification for Indoor Plenum Application Cables, 1993
[19] ANSI/TIA/EIA-472DAAA, Detail Specification for Outdoor, All-Dielectric Application Cables,
1993
[20] ANSI/TIA/EIA-492AAAA: Detail Specification for 62.5m Core Diameter/125m Cladding Diameter Class Ia Multimode, Graded-Index Optical Waveguide Fibers, 1997
[21] ANSI/TIA/EIA-492AAAB: Detail Specification for 50m Core Diameter/125m Cladding Diameter Class Ia Multimode, Graded-Index Optical Waveguide Fibers, 1998
[22] ANSI/TIA/EIA-492CAAA: Detail Specification for Class Iva Dispersion-Unshifted Singlemode
Optical Fiber, 1997
[23] ANSI/ICEA S835961994, Standard for Fiber Optic Premises Distribution Cable.
[24] ANSI/ICEA S876401992, Standard for Fiber Optic Outside Plant Communications Cable.
123

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

F.1.2.2 Informative References


The following documents are informative and may be useful when referring to this specification.
[25] ANSI/TIA/EIA475: Generic Specification for Fiber Optic Connectors, May 1996

[26] ANSI/TIA/EIA-568: Commercial Building Telecommunications Optical Fiber Wiring Standard,


1999 (Concurrently in process by TIA Subcommittee TR41.8 as TIA PN 3723)
[27] ANSI/TIA/EIA568: Commercial Building Telecommunications Wiring Standard, 1995.
[28] ISO/IEC 11801: Information technology Generic cabling for customer premises, May 1995.
F.1.2.3 Definitions
Editors Note: Superscript source references are included for informational purposes only during the ballot
process. They will not appear in the published specification.

F.1.2.3.1

Backbone: a facility (e.g., pathway, cable or conductor) between telecommunications


closets, or floor distribution terminals, the entrance facilities, and the equipment rooms
within or between buildings.1)

F.1.2.3.2

Backbone cable: see backbone.2)

F.1.2.3.3

Cable assembly, optical: an optical cable that is connector terminated. Generally, an


optical cable that has been terminated by a manufacturer and is ready for installation.3)

F.1.2.3.4

Cabling: a combination of all cables, wire, cords, and connecting hardware.3)

F.1.2.3.5

Centralized cabling: A cabling configuration from the work area to a centralized crossconnect using pull through cables, an interconnect, or splice in the telecommunications
closet.4)

F.1.2.3.6

Cord (Fiber Optic): a flexible cable assembly with a tensile strength member for each
connector. See Work area cable (cord); Patch cord, Equipment Cable (Cord).

F.1.2.3.7

Distribution cable: the cable/conductor from the auxiliary telecommunications


disconnect outlet/connector or the distribution device in a customers premises to the
backbone facility or the point of demarcation.5)

F.1.2.3.8

Equipment cable (cord): a cable or cable assembly used to connect telecommunications


equipment to horizontal or backbone cabling.5)

F.1.2.3.9

Fiber Optic Connector Set: The total connector components required to provide
demountable coupling between two or more optical fiber cables.2)

F.1.2.3.10 Horizontal cabling: the cabling between and including the telecommunications
outlet/connector and the horizontal cross-connect. 3)
F.1.2.3.11 Kit, Connector Set (fiber optics): A connector set that is unterminated.6)
F.1.2.3.12 Link: a transmission path between two points, not including terminal equipment, work
area cables, and equipment cables.3)
1). from

TIA 440-A
TIA 475-C
3).
from TIA 568-A
4). from TIA 568-A text, Fig. 12-3, Annex F
5). from draft TIA 568-B.3, 8/24/98
6). from TIA 41.8.5 WG acceptd conplilation 3/96
2). from

124

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

F.1.2.3.13

Patchcord connector set (fiber optics): an assembly with the plug connector
component and/or socket connector component assembled on both ends of a length of
fiber/cable.1)

F.1.2.3.14

PlugSocket configuration: A connector set consisting of one plug and one socket.
The mechanical coupling mechanism and optical alignment mechanism are self contained
in the two connector halves.2)

F.1.2.3.15

Work area cable (cord): a cable assembly connecting the telecommunications


outlet/connector to the terminal equipment. 3)

F.1.3

Product Identification

A non-mandatory identification system is provided that uniquely identifies each product configuration
associated with this specification by a coded alphanumeric sequence.
table K.2 summarizes designated component identification options.
The following example of a complete product identification number is comprised of seven coded variant positions as indicated: CGHA2A15
NOTE This identification sequence is compatible with conventions used to generate ANSI/TIA/EIA and
ISO/IEC Detail Specification numbers. The detail specification number is inserted before the product number
to form a complete sequence.

(example: ANSI/TIA/EIA 47500_ _- CGHA2A15)


F.1.3.1 Variant identification numbers
The variant identification numbering sequence designates alternative product configurations. Seven
variant position numbers are designated to generate a complete, unique Product Identification Number. Variant Identification Numbers are summarized in table H.2.

Table H.1 Variant position #1 indicates Component Arrangement:


Designator

Component Arrangement

Kit (Socket)

Patch Cord (Individual connector strain relief, terminated Plug(s) each end

Distribution Cable not connectorized

Table H.2 Variant position #2 indicates Component Configuration:


Designator
G
C

1
X

Component
Arrangement
SG Patch Cord
SG SG

Component Configuration

Interface per TIA6047 (FOCIS 7), n = 2, a = 8,


Both cable ends
per TIA6047 (FOCIS 7), n = 2, a = 8 one cable end;
Hybrid Patch Cord
per TIA6043 (FOCIS 3), d = 0, n = 1, a = 0,
SG SC
two Plugs required on this cable end
TIA-604-7 (FOCIS 7), n = 2, a = 8, d = 0, m = 0
Kit (Socket)
(Unspecified mounting style)
TIA-604-7 (FOCIS 7), n = 2, a = 8, d = 1, m = 1
(RJ45 snap-in mounting style)
Not used for Distribution Cable Arrangement

125

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

Table H.3 Variant position #3 indicates the Optical Fiber Type


Designator

Optical Fiber Type

Multi-mode, 62.5/125 m GRIN per ANSI/TIA/EIA-492AAAA

Multi-mode, 50/125 m GRIN per ANSI/TIA/EIA-492AAAB

Single-Mode, 10/125 m Class IVa Dispersion-Unshifted per ANSI/TIA/EIA-492CAAA

Table H.4 Variant position #4 indicates the fiber Coating / Buffer Sizes
Designator

Fiber Coating / Buffer Diameters

250 m Coating / No Buffer

250 m Coating / 900 m Buffer

Table H.5 Variant position #5 indicates the number of cabled fibers


Designator Code

Acceptable fiber
count

Designator
Code

Acceptable
fiber count

Designator
Code

Acceptable
fiber count

12

24

16

30

18

36

20

48

Not Applicable for Kit (Socket)

Table H.6 Variant position #6 indicates the Cable Designation


Designator

Cable Designation

Indoor Plenum Applications per ANSI/TIA/EIA-472CAAA

Optional Indoor Non-Plenum Applications per ANSI/ICEA S-83-596

Outdoor, All-Dielectric Applications per ANSI/TIA/EIA-472DAAA

Optional Outdoor Applications per ANSI/ICEA S-87-640

Not Applicable for Kit (Socket)

Table H.7 Variant position #7 indicates the Cable Length


Designator

Cable Designation

digit(s)

Cable length in meters

Not Applicable for Kit (Socket)

126

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

F.1.4

TIA 604 (FOCIS) Connector Specifications

The broader scope of FOCIS standards provides alternative component variants that are not compatible in all combinations. As a result, the following attribute designation constraints shall apply to all
variants of this Specification:

F.1.4.1 TIA 6047 (FOCIS7) Plug Designation


The Plug designation sequence defined in FOCIS7 is FOCIS7Pnkfa, where:
P is the Plug designation.
n is the number of fibers.
k defines the keying arrangement.
f defines the optical fiber diameter.
a is the angle of contact.
FOCIS 7 plug designations P, n, and a are defined by Variant Position # 2. For all variants of this
Specification, all Plugs shall be duplex configuration, n = 2, and the angle of fiber contact shall be 8
degrees, a = 8.
Optical fiber diameter f is identified by Variant Position # 3.
Exclusionary keying features shall not be incorporated within this Specification. The FOCIS 7 variant
designation k shall be k = 1 for all plugs.

F.1.4.2 TIA 6047 (FOCIS 7) Socket Designation


The designation sequence for a FOCIS 7 Socket is FOCIS7Sndkfam, where:
S is the Socket designation.
n is the number of fibers.
d defines the socket design
k defines the keying configuration.
f defines the optical fiber diameter
a defines the angle of contact
m designates the mounting configuration.
FOCIS 7 socket designations S, n, and a are defined by Variant Position # 2. For all variants of
this Specification, all Sockets shall be duplex configuration, n = 2, and the angle of fiber contact shall
be 8 degrees, a = 8.
Socket mounting designation m is also defined by Variant Position # 2. Configuration m = 0 (unspecified mounting) or m = 1 (RJ45 snap-in mounting) may be selected.
Optical fiber diameter f is identified by Variant Position # 3.
Exclusionary keying features shall not be incorporated within this Specification. The FOCIS 7 variant
designation k shall be k = 1 for all sockets.

127

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

F.1.4.3 TIA 6043 (FOCIS 3) Plug Designation


The designation for a FOCIS 3 Plug is FOCIS-3P-0-1-1-4-0 for multi mode, and FOCIS-3P-0-1-11-0 for single mode, where:
P is the Plug designation
d defines the plug design
n is the number of fibers
k defines the keying arrangement
t defines the ferrule diameter
a is the angle of contact
FOCIS 3 plug designations P, d, n", and a are defined by Variant Position # 2. For all variants of
this Specification, Plugs shall be design = 0 (functional interface option), n = 1 (only a simplex plug is
defined), and the angle of contact shall be 0 degrees, a = 0.
Ferrule diameter tolerance t shall be t = 4 for all multi mode variants, and t = 1 for all single mode
variants.
Exclusionary keying features shall not be incorporated within this Specification. The FOCIS 3 variant
designation k shall be k = 1 for all plugs.
Duplex Clips that link simplex connector plugs and do not impair intermateability or optical performance may be utilized to engage FOCIS 3 Duplex Adapter Interface n = 2.

F.1.5

Optical Fiber Specification

Variant Position # 3 of table K.2 identifies the specified Optical Fiber Type.
Detail Specifications ANSI/EIA/TIA492AAAA or ANSI/EIA/TIA492AAAB for multimode optical fibers, and Detail Specification ANSI/EIA/TIA492CAAA for singlemode optical fibers, define optical fiber specification, classification parameters, and assessment criteria.
Certain configuration parameters and optical performance requirements are classified as attributes
dependent on cable design. They are referenced, but not directly specified within the optical fiber detail specifications. Additional configuration definitions and specification is delegated to a separate
purchasing agreement (i.e., procurement document) named Detail Specification Extension (DSE).

F.1.6

Fiber Optic Communications Cable Specification

Cable Designation is indicated by Variant Position # 6 of table K.2.


TIA and ICEA specifications define generally equivalent requirements in dissimilar formats. ANSI/TIA/EIA472CAAA and ANSI/ICEA S83596 define cable specifications and assessment criteria
for indoor applications. ANSI/TIA/EIA472DAAA and ANSI/ICEA S87640 define equivalent parameters for outdoor applications. Both formats also delegate attributes to be defined by a separate purchase, or procurement document (see 1.5).

128

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

F.1.6.1 Cable Performance Parameters


Each cabled fiber shall meet the specifications of table H.8.

Table H.8 Optical Fiber Transmission Performance Requirements


Optical Fiber
Cable Type

Wavelength (nm)

50/125 m
62.5/125 m
Single-Mode
Indoor Cable
Single-Mode
Outdoor Cable

850
1300
850
1300
1310
1550
1310
1550

Maximum Attenuation
(dB/km)
3.5
1.5
3.5
1.5
1.0
1.0
0.5
0.5

Minimum Information
Transmission Capacity
(MHzkm)
500
500
160
500
See Note 2
See Note 2

Notes:
1

The information transmission capacity for uncabled optical fibers may be used to demonstrate compliance for this requirement.

All single-mode cables shall incorporate a Cut-Off Wavelength of 1270 nm for uncabled fiber per ANSI/TIA/EIA-455-170.

F.1.6.2 Fiber Coating and Buffer sizes


This cable attribute is to be indicated in Variant Position # 4 of table H.2.

F.1.6.3 Acceptable Fiber Count


This cable attribute is to be indicated by Variant Position #5 of table H.2. Designator codes are based
on configurations defined by the noted detail specifications.

F.1.6.4 Cable Length


This cable attribute is to be indicated in Variant Position # 7 of table H.2. Specify cable length in
meters as defined by figure H.3.

129

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

F.1.7

Supplementary information

F.1.7.1 Component and Package Marking Requirements


No marking requirements are mandatory. Optional marking shall conform to the principles of ANSI/TIA/EIA475 and may include the following preferred items and their order of marking:
1) Manufacturer's identification mark
2) Manufacturer's part number
3) Manufacturing date code
4) Variant identification number
5) Type name

F.1.7.2 Color Coding Requirements


Individual fibers and fiber groups shall be identifiable in accordance with ANSI/TIA/EIA 598
Components shall utilize color to visibly distinguish optical fiber types. For compliance with ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-A and ISO/IEC 11801, identify a portion of all multi-mode components with beige;
identify a portion of all single-mode components with blue. Additional color alternatives may be established by future or additional references.

130

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

Table H.9 Variant identification numbers


Number

Variant

Description
Variant position #1 indicating Component Arrangement

S=

Kit (Socket)

C=

Patch Cord (individual connector strain relief, two terminated Plugs)

D=

Distribution Cable not connectorized

XXXXXXX

Variant position #2 indicating Component Configuration


For Patch Cord :
G=

per TIA 6047 (FOCIS 7): n = 2, a = 8, both ends (SG SG)

C=

per TIA 6047 (FOCIS 7): n = 2, a = 8, one end (SG SC)


per TIA 6043 (FOCIS 3): d = 0, n = 1, a = 0, two required one end
For Kit (Socket) :

XXXXXXX
0=

TIA6047, FOCIS 7, n = 2, d = 0, m = 0
(Unspecified mounting style)

1=

TIA6047, FOCIS 7, n = 2, d = 1, m = 1
(RJ45 snapin mounting style)

For Premises Cable :


Not used for Distribution Cable Arrangement
Variant position #3 indicating Optical Fiber Type

XXXXXXX

H=

Multi-mode, 62.5/125 m GRIN per ANSI/TIA/EIA492AAAA

C=

Multi-mode, 50/125 m GRIN per ANSI/TIA/EIA492AAAB

S=

Single-mode, 10/125 m Class IVa Dispersion-Unshifted


per ANSI/TIA/EIA492CAAA
Variant position #4 indicating Coating / Buffer Sizes

XXXXXXX
AB

A= 250/None, B= 250/900
Variant position #5 indicating Number of Cabled Fibers

XXXXXXX

28,
AH

2= 2, 4= 4, 6= 6, 8= 8,
A= 12, B= 16, C= 18, D= 20, E= 24, F= S30, G= 36, H= 48

X=

Not Used for Kit Arrangement


Variant position #6 indicating Cable Designation

A=

Indoor Plenum Applications per ANSI/TIA/EIA472CAAA

B=

Optional Indoor Non-Plenum Applications per ANSI/ICEA S-83-596

C=

Outdoor, All-Dielectric Applications per ANSI/TIA/EIA472DAAA

D=

Optional Outdoor Applications per ANSI/ICEA S-87-640

X=

Not Used for Kit Arrangement

XXXXXXX

Variant position #7 indicating Cable Length

XXXXXXX

(digit)=
X=

Specify length in meters for C and D Component Arrangements


Not Used for Kit Arrangement

131

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

F.2 Outline drawings

Variant "S" = Kit (Socket)

Figure H.2 FOCIS 7 kit arrangement

Specified Length

Variant "G" = SG SG Patch Cord

Variant "C" = SG SC Hybrid Patch Cord


Figure 3: FOCIS 7 Patch Cord Arrangements

Figure H.3 FOCIS 7 pach cord arrangements

F.3 Requirements
F.3.1

Dimensional requirements

All specified connector types, arrangements, and variants shall comply with the dimensional requirements defined by the appropriate fiber optic connector intermateability standard. Applicable measurements shall be made following termination to cabled optical fibers according to the
manufacturer's recommended procedures.

F.3.2

Performance requirements

Table 3, Measurement and Performance Requirements, provides mandatory evaluation parameters,


conditions, and procedural information and specifies acceptance criteria limits of this Specification.
132

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

FOTP test procedures (ANSI/TIA/EIA-455-XX) define information to be provided for conducting each
test, and the format for reporting results. No sequential test regimen or test specimen reuse is required.

F.3.2.1 Test specimens


Construct test specimens utilizing randomly selected individual connector set components. Testing
may be conducted in combination with previously qualified mating components, or by concurrent connector set component qualification. Test performance criteria of table K.2 are not intended to utilize
reference components.

F.3.2.2 Test wavelengths


Test and report optical performance for all multi-mode component arrangements at either 850 or
1300 nm wavelength. Similarly, test and report all single-mode component arrangements at either
1310 or 1550 nm wavelength.

F.3.2.3 Kit qualification procedures


Use the following procedure to establish compliance for Kit arrangement components (i.e., those not
typically terminated to optical fibers/cables at the primary stage of manufacture):
1) Fabricate Kit test specimens with optical fiber terminations utilizing manufacturers' recommended field tooling, termination procedures, and inspection techniques.
2) Subject test specimens to all relevant qualification tests and inspection sequences as functionally equivalent alternatives to factory assembled components.

F.3.2.4 Structural similarity


Grouping structurally similar components for the purpose of simplified qualification is established by
TIA/EIA475 and is also a provision of this Specification. Structurally similar product groups may be
formed within similar component Arrangements and pluralities to reduce test quantity requirements.
Examples include: 1) components with identical materials, construction, and processes common to
multiple variants; or 2) grouping of similar multifiber cable assemblies with varying numbers of identical cabled fibers or lengths. Multiple manufacturing locations using identical components, materials,
and processes shall not require redundant testing.

133

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

F.4 Measurement and performance requirements


F.4.1

Visual and mechanical inspection: FOTP 13

Details Size measurement methods: per FOCIS 7


Deviations:
None

F.4.2

Attenuation: FOTP 34

Details Method A2 for multi-mode fiber, Method B for single mode fiber
Fiber Type:
as required per variant
Cable Type:
as required per variant
Source:
Report nominal wavelength, spectral width
Requirement:
0.75 dB
Deviations:
None

F.4.3

Return loss: FOTP 107

Details Source:
Wavelength per clause 3.2.3 50 nm maximum
Fiber Type:
as required per variant
Cable Type:
as required per variant
Report DUT termination and interconnect/splice methods utilized
Requirement:
multimode min. loss 20 dB, singlemode min. loss 26 dB
Deviations:
None

F.4.4

Low temperature: FOTP 188

Details Precondition mated specimen 24 hr. per FOTP 188, clause 5.4.1
Temperature:
10 C
Duration:
4 days
Deviations:
None
Initial Measurements and Performance Requirements:
Insertion Loss:
0.75 dB
Measurements and Performance Requirements During Test:
maximum change in insertion loss: 0.3 dB total
Final Measurements and Performance Requirements:
Insertion Loss:
0.75 dB
Return Loss:
multimode min. loss 20 dB, singlemode min. loss 26 dB

F.4.5

Temperature life: FOTP 4

Details Test Condition: 60C


Test Time Condition: 14 days
Deviations:
None
Initial Measurements and Performance Requirements:
Insertion Loss:
0.75 dB
Measurements and Performance Requirements During Test:
maximum change in insertion loss:
0.3 dB total
Insertion Loss:
0.75 dB
Return Loss:
multimode min. loss 20 dB, singlemode min. loss 26 dB

134

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

F.4.6

Humidity: FOTP 5

Details No preconditioning required in specified test sequence following FOTP 4


Test Method A:
Steady-state, Specimen Mated
Final Measurements and Performance requirements.
Test Condition A:
96 hours (4 days) of 90-95% RH at 40 2 C
Deviations:
None
Initial Measurements and Performance Requirements:
Insertion Loss:
0.75 dB
Measurements and Performance Requirements During Test:
maximum change in insertion loss: 0.4 dB total
Final Measurements and Performance requirements.
Insertion Loss:
0.75 dB maximum
Return Loss:
multimode min. loss 20 dB, singlemode min. loss 26 dB

F.4.7

Strength of coupling mechanism: FOTP 185

Details Tensile Force:


Load Application Rate:
Duration:
Specimen:
Deviations:

33 Newtons (N) at 0 pull angle


25.4 mm/minute
5 seconds minimum
Mated
None

Initial Measurements and Performance Requirements:


Insertion Loss:
0.75 dB
Measurements and Performance Requirements During Test:
None
Final Measurements and Performance Requirements:
Insertion Loss:
0.75 dB
Return Loss:
multimode min. loss 20 dB, singlemode min. loss 26 dB

F.4.8

Durability: FOTP 21

Details Number of Cycles:500


Deviations:
None
Initial Measurements and Performance Requirements:
Insertion Loss:
0.75 dB
Measurements and Performance Requirements During Test:
None
Final Measurements and Performance Requirements:
Insertion Loss:
0.75 dB
Return Loss: multimode min. loss 20 dB, singlemode min. loss 26 dB

F.4.9

Impact: FOTP 2

Detail Method B (Light Service Class): 8 drops from 1.8 meter height
Deviations:
None
Initial Measurements and Performance Requirements:
Insertion Loss:
0.75 dB

135

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

Measurements and Performance Requirements During Test:


None
Final Measurements and Performance Requirements:
Insertion Loss:
0.75 dB
Return Loss:
multimode min. loss 20 dB, singlemode min. loss 26 dB

F.4.10

Flex: FOTP 1

Details Applied Weight:


Test fixture rotation cycle:
Manual operation:

0.5 kg per terminated cable sheath;


or 224 g per buffered or coated fiber
0, +90, 0, 90, 0 for 100 cycles
25 cm Distance from Pivot Point to Mandrel Center
7.5 cm nominal Mandrel diameter

Deviations: None
Initial Measurements and Performance Requirements:
Insertion Loss:
0.75 dB
Measurements and Performance Requirements During Test:
None
Final Measurements and Performance Requirements:
Insertion Loss:
0.75 dB
Return Loss:
multimode min. loss 20 dB, singlemode min. loss 26 dB

F.4.11

Twist: FOTP 36

Details Specimen Mated


Tensile Load:

15 N at 0 pull angle per terminated cable sheath;


or 2.2 N at 0 pull angle per buffered or coated fiber
Rotate through the following cycle:
2.5 revolutions in one direction, reverse for 5 revolutions,
and reverse 2.5 revolutions to the initial position. Repeat 10 times
Deviations:
None

Initial Measurements and Performance Requirements:


Insertion Loss:
0.75 dB
Measurements and Performance Requirements During Test:
None
Final Measurements and Performance Requirements:
Insertion Loss:
0.75 dB
Return Loss:
multimode min. loss 20 dB, singlemode min. loss 26 dB

F.4.12

Cable retention: FOTP 6

F.4.12.1 Test sequence number 1:


Details Specimen Mated
Tensile Load1 for jacketed optical fiber cables with strength members:
66 N at 0 pull angle per terminated cable sheath; or
2
Tensile Load for buffered or coated fibers:
2.2 N at 0 pull angle per terminated buffered or coated fiber
Duration:
5 seconds minimum
Deviations:
None

136

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

Initial Measurements and Performance Requirements:


Insertion Loss:
0.75 dB
Measurements and Performance Requirements During Test:
None
Sequence Ending Measurements and Performance Requirements:
Attenuation 0.5 dB increase and Insertion Loss 0.75 dB
Return Loss:
multimode min. loss 20 dB, singlemode min. loss 26 dB

F.4.12.2 Test sequence number 2:


Details Specimen Mated
Tensile Load1 for jacketed optical fiber cables with strength members:
19.4 N at 90 pull angle per terminated cable sheath; or
Tensile Load2 for buffered or coated fibers:
2.2 N at 90 pull angle per terminated buffered or coated fiber
Duration:
5 seconds minimum
Deviations: None
Initial Measurements and Performance Requirements:
Insertion Loss:
0.75 dB
Measurements and Performance Requirements During Test:
None
Final Measurements and Performance Requirements:
Attenuation 0.5 dB increase and Insertion Loss 0.75 dB
Return Loss:
multimode min. loss 20 dB, singlemode min. loss 26 dB

137

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

Annex J(informative)
LC optical connector requirements
Specification for FOCIS 10, Type LC Connector Interface Connector Set Components and Cable Assemblies, for Inside Building Wiring Applications of Fibre ChannelPhysical Interface Standard (FC
PI)

Fiber optic connector set classification:

Type: Interface: LC
Configuration: Plug-Adapter-Plug
Coupling Engagement: Latched push-pull
Mating Face Limits of Tolerance: ANSI/TIA/EIA-604-10 (FOCIS 10)
Style: Optical Coupling: PC (Physical Contact)
Fiber Alignment: Resilient Sleeve

Fiber Retention: as required


Cable Retention: as required

Arrangements: Kit (Plug), Adapter, Patch Cord, Distribution Cable


Variants: Number of fibers, optical fiber type, fiber coating / buffer size, cable type,
cable length, hybrid patch cord connector type.
Climatic category: 10/60/04 applicable to Connector Set Components
0/50/04 applicable to specified Indoor Cables
40/60/04 applicable to specified Outdoor Cables
Outline drawing and maximum dimensions:

57Ref.

76 Ref.

32 Max.

Plug

R25 Min.

51 Max.

Plug
Adapter

R25 Min.

Figure 1: Assembled Connector Set, Type LC Connector


Figure H.4 Assembled connector set, type LC connector

138

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

J.1 General
The intent of this Specification is to enable end users and manufacturers to uniformly specify fiber optic connector set components and cable assemblies incorporating Type LC Fiber Optic Connector Interface Standard, ANSI/TIA/EIA-604-10 (FOCIS 10). Application of this specification is intended to
assure component interoperability, and to define recommended application performance for the
physical infrastructure required to support Fibre Channel Physical Interface Standard (FCPI).
This document has been formulated under the cognizance of NCITS Technical Committee T11, Device Level Interfaces.

J.1.1 Scope
Optical fiber connector set components and cable assemblies are specified that comply with ANSI/TIA/EIA-604-10, Fiber Optic Connector Intermateability Standard, Type LC.
It is the intent of this specification that full intermateability of connector set components will be realized on the basis that FOCIS 10 establishes the necessary parameters to ensure intermateability.
Connector sets from different sources are considered fully intermateable when connector parts from
one source will mate with complementary parts from other sources without mechanical interference,
while maintaining specified optical performance.
Appropriate applications for components specified by this Specification are fiber optic communications inter-connect, cross-connect, and distribution cabling located within and between buildings in a
campus environment. All in-service optical fibers are connectorized, all connector interfaces are located within building perimeter walls, and network distribution may extend up to and including connection to the communications outlet/optical port of desktop equipment.

J.1.1.1 Suitability for environmental conditions


Environmental hazards of intrabuilding interconnection locations are generally benign. ANSI/TIA/EIA475 defines this controlled environment as Environmental Category I and identifies minimum performance criteria. Relevant commercial building wiring standards ANSI/TIA/EIA568A and
ISO/IEC 11801 specify recommended climatic temperature extremes of 10 C to +60 C.
Interbuilding cable placement is also within the stated scope of ANSI/TIA/EIA568A. This application is conditionally supported with stipulation that all connector terminations are located inside building perimeter walls. Suitable applications of specified outside plant cables are limited to continuous
lengths of connectorized interbuilding cables.
Specification and qualification for outdoor placement and operation of passive interconnecting devices is not within the scope of this Specification.

J.1.1.2 Long link lengths


Connector set attenuation limits are not intended to also include the intrinsic attenuation present in
long length optical fiber links. To facilitate acceptance criteria of long length cable assemblies, the following procedure may be used: Calculate, from the actual cable length, the maximum allowable attenuation of the specified optical fiber type and operating wavelength. Deduct this allowable intrinsic
loss from the measured cable link attenuation, and report the resultant value for connector attenuation.

J.1.1.3 Quality assurance


It is the responsibility of the manufacturer to establish quality assurance procedures that will ensure
the product satisfies the requirements of relevant specifications on a continuing basis. It is not intended that a complete testing program be carried out on every specified component or cable assembly.
When the user wishes to specify acceptance tests or other quality procedures, it is essential that
agreement be reached between the user and the manufacturer at the time of ordering.
139

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

J.1.2

Related documents

NOTE Several referenced standards are in a concurrent process of revision or are pending publication, they
are indicated by Italics. Where provisions of an update is significant to this specification, the most current reference is provided with the intent it will supercede prior issues when published.

J.1.2.1 Normative references


[1] EIA/TIA-440-A: Fiber Optic Connector Terminology, January 1989.
[2]

EIA/TIA-455-1: FOTP 1A, Cable Flexing for Fiber Optic Interconnecting devices, Nov. 1988.

[3]

EIA/TIA-455-2: FOTP 2B, Impact Test Measurement for Fiber Optic Devices, Nov. 1990.

[4]

EIA/TIA-455-4: FOTP 4B, Fiber Optic Connector /Component Temperature Life, Sept. 1993.

[5]

EIA/TIA-455-5: FOTP 5B, Humidity Test Procedure for Fiber Optic Connecting Devices, July
1994.

[6]

EIA/TIA-455-6: FOTP 6B, Cable Retention Test Procedure for Fiber Optic Cable Interconnecting Devices, March 1992.

[7]

EIA/TIA-455-13: FOTP 13A, Visual and Mechanical Inspection of Fibers, Cables, Connectors,
and/or Other Fiber Optic Devices, 1995

[8]

EIA-455-21: FOTP 21A, Mating Durability for Fiber Optic Interconnecting Devices, Nov. 1988.

[9]

EIA-455-34: FOTP 34, Interconnection Device Insertion Loss Test, May 1985.

[10] EIA/TIA-455-107: FOTP 107, Return Loss for Fiber Optic components, Feb. 1989
[11] TIA/EIA-455-170: Cable Cutoff Wavelength of Single-Mode Fiber by Transmitted Power, November 1989
[12] EIA/TIA-455-171: FOTP 171, Attenuation by Substitution Measurement - for Short-Length Multimode Graded-Index and Single-Mode Optical Fiber Cable Assemblies, July 1987.
[13] EIA/TIA-455-185: FOTP 185, Strength of Coupling Mechanism for Fiber Optic Interconnecting
Devices, May 1991.
[14] EIA/TIA-455-188: FOTP 188, Low-Temperature Testing of Fiber Optic Components, Jan. 1992
[15] ANSI/TIA/EIA-604: Fiber Optic Connector Intermateability Standards (FOCIS), Nov. 1993
[16] ANSI/TIA/EIA-604-10: FOCIS 10, Fiber Optic Connector Intermateability Standard Type LC,
1999.
[17] ANSI/TIA/EIA-604-3: FOCIS 3, Fiber Optic Connector Intermateability Standard Type SC,
1997.
[18] ANSI/TIA/EIA-472CAAA, Detail Specification for Indoor Plenum Application Cables, 1993
[19] ANSI/TIA/EIA-472DAAA, Detail Specification for Outdoor, All-Dielectric Application Cables,
1993
[20] ANSI/TIA/EIA-492AAAA: Detail Specification for 62.5m Core Diameter/125m Cladding Diameter Class Ia Multimode, Graded-Index Optical Waveguide Fibers, 1997
[21] ANSI/TIA/EIA-492AAAB: Detail Specification for 50m Core Diameter/125m Cladding Diameter Class Ia Multimode, Graded-Index Optical Waveguide Fibers, 1998
[22] ANSI/TIA/EIA-492CAAA: Detail Specification for Class Iva Dispersion-Unshifted Singlemode
Optical Fiber, 1997
[23] ANSI/ICEA S835961994, Standard for Fiber Optic Premises Distribution Cable.
[24] ANSI/ICEA S876401992, Standard for Fiber Optic Outside Plant Communications Cable.
140

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

J.1.2.2 Informative references


The following documents are informative and may be useful when referring to this specification.
[25] ANSI/TIA/EIA475C: Generic Specification for Fiber Optic Connectors, May 1996

[26] ANSI/TIA/EIA-568B.3: Commercial Building Telecommunications Optical Fiber Wiring Standard, 1999 (Concurrently in process by TIA Subcommittee TR41.8 as TIA PN 3723)
[27] ANSI/TIA/EIA568A: Commercial Building Telecommunications Wiring Standard, 1995.
[28] ISO/IEC 11801: Information technology Generic cabling for customer premises, May 1995.
J.1.2.3 Definitions
NOTE Superscript source references are included for informational purposes only during the ballot process.
They will not appear in the published specification.

J.1.2.3.1

Adapter: the element of the connector assembly that joins two plugs

J.1.2.3.2

Backbone: a facility (e.g., pathway, cable or conductor) between telecommunications


closets, or floor distribution terminals, the entrance facilities, and the equipment rooms
within or between buildings.3)

J.1.2.3.3

Backbone cable: see backbone.3)

J.1.2.3.4

Cable assembly, optical: an optical cable that is connector terminated. Generally, an


optical cable that has been terminated by a manufacturer and is ready for installation.

J.1.2.3.5

Cabling: a combination of all cables, wire, cords, and connecting hardware.3)

J.1.2.3.6

Centralized cabling: A cabling configuration from the work area to a centralized crossconnect using pull through cables, an interconnect, or splice in the telecommunications
closet.)

J.1.2.3.7

Cord (Fiber Optic): a flexible cable assembly with a tensile strength member for each
connector. See Work area cable (cord); Patch cord, Equipment Cable (Cord).

J.1.2.3.8

Distribution cable: the cable/conductor from the auxiliary telecommunications


disconnect outlet/connector or the distribution device in a customers premises to the
backbone facility or the point of demarcation.5)

J.1.2.3.9

Equipment cable (cord): a cable or cable assembly used to connect telecommunications


equipment to horizontal or backbone cabling. 3)

J.1.2.3.10 Fiber Optic Connector Set: The total connector components required to provide
demountable coupling between two or more optical fiber cables.2)
J.1.2.3.11 Horizontal cabling: the cabling between and including the telecommunications
outlet/connector and the horizontal cross-connect. 3)
J.1.2.3.12 Kit, Connector Set (fiber optics): A connector set that is unterminated.2)
J.1.2.3.13 Link: a transmission path between two points, not including terminal equipment, work
area cables, and equipment cables.3)
J.1.2.3.14 Patchcord connector set (fiber optics): an assembly with the plug connector
component and/or socket connector component assembled on both ends of a length of
fiber/cable.2)

141

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

J.1.2.3.15

PlugSocket configuration: A connector set consisting of one plug and one socket.
The mechanical coupling mechanism and optical alignment mechanism are self contained
in the two connector halves.2)

J.1.2.3.16

Work area cable (cord): a cable assembly connecting the telecommunications


outlet/connector to the terminal equipment. 3)

1)

from TIA 440-A


from TIA 475-C
3)
from TIA 568-A
4)
from TIA 568-A text, Fig. 12-3, Annex F
5)
from TIA 41.8.5 WG accepted compilation 3/96
6)
from draft TIA 568B.3, 8/24/98
2)

J.1.3

Product Identification

A non-mandatory identification system is provided that uniquely identifies each product configuration
associated with this specification by a coded alphanumeric sequence.
table I.2 summarizes designated component identification options.
The following example of a complete product identification number is comprised of seven coded variant positions as indicated: CGHA2A15

Note: This identification sequence is compatible with conventions used to generate


ANSI/TIA/EIA and ISO/IEC Detail Specification numbers. The detail specification number is
inserted before the product number to form a complete sequence.
(example: ANSI/TIA/EIA 47500_ _- CGHA2A15)
J.1.3.1 Variant Identification Numbers
The variant identification numbering sequence designates alternative product configurations. Seven
variant position numbers are designated to generate a complete, unique Product Identification Number. Variant Identification Numbers are summarized in table I.2.

Table I.1 Variant position #1 indicates Component Arrangement


Designator

Component Arrangement

Kit (Plug)

Adapter

Patchcord

Distribution Cable- not connectorized

142

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

Table I.2 Variant position #2 indicates Component Configuration


Designator

Component
Arrangement

Component Configuration

LC Patchcord
LC - LC

Per TIA-604-10 (FOCIS 10), d=2, n=2, a=0


Both cable ends

Hybrid Patchcord
LC - SC

Kit (Plug)

Per TIA-604-10 (FOCIS 10), d=2, n=2, a=0, t=1

Kit (Plug)

Per TIA-604-10 (FOCIS 10), d=2, n=2, a=0, t=2

Adapter

per TIA-604-10 (FOCIS 10) n=2, m=0


(unspecified mounting style)

Per TIA-604-10 (FOCIS 10), d=2, n=2, a=0, one cable end;
Per TIA-604-3 (FOCIS 3), d=0, n=2, a=0, Two plugs required on this
cable end.

Per TIA-604-10 (FOCIS 10), n=2, m=2


(Duplex RJ-45 snap-in mounting style)

2
X

Not used for Distribution Cable Arrangement

Table I.3 Variant position #3 indicates the Optical Fiber Type


Designator

Optical Fiber Type

Multi-mode, 62.5/125 m GRIN per ANSI/TIA/EIA-492AAAA

Multi-mode, 50/125 m GRIN per ANSI/TIA/EIA-492AAAB

Single-Mode, 10/125 m Class IVa Dispersion-Unshifted per ANSI/TIA/EIA492CAAA

Table I.4 Variant position #4 indicates the fiber Coating / Buffer Sizes
Designator

Fiber Coating / Buffer Diameters

250 m Coating / No Buffer

250 m Coating / 900 m Buffer

Table I.5 Variant position #5 indicates the number of cabled fibers


Designator Code

Acceptable fiber
count

Designator
Code

Acceptable
fiber count

Designator
Code

Acceptable
fiber count

12

24

16

30

18

36

20

48

Not Applicable for Kit (plug)

143

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

Table I.6 Variant position #6 indicates the Cable Designation


Designator

Cable Designation

Indoor Plenum Applications per ANSI/TIA/EIA-472CAAA

Optional Indoor Non-Plenum Applications per ANSI/ICEA S-83-596

Outdoor, All-Dielectric Applications per ANSI/TIA/EIA-472DAAA

Optional Outdoor Applications per ANSI/ICEA S-87-640

Not Applicable for Kit (plug)

Table I.7 Variant position #7 indicates the Cable Length


Designator

Cable Designation

digit(s)

Cable length in meters

Not Applicable for Kit (plug)

J.1.4

TIA 604 (FOCIS) Connector Specifications

The broader scope of FOCIS standards provide alternative component variants that are not compatible in all combinations. As a result, the following attribute designation constraints shall apply to all
variants of this Specification:

J.1.4.1 TIA 604-10 (FOCIS 10) Plug Designation


The plug designation sequence in FOCIS 10 is FOCIS-10-P-d-n-k-t-a, where:
"P" designates the plug
"d" defines the plug design
"n" is the number of fibers
"k" defines the keying arrangement
"t" defines the ferrule diameter
"a" is the angle of contact
FOCIS 10 plug designations P, n, and a are defined by variant position #2. For all variants of this
specification, all plugs shall be duplex configuration, d = 2, n = 2 and the angle of fiber contact shall
be 0 degrees, a = 0.
Ferrule diameter tolerance t shall be t =2 for all multi mode variants, and t = 1 for all single mode
variants.

J.1.4.2 TIA 604-10 (FOCIS 10) Adapter Designation


The adapter designation sequence in FOCIS 10 is FOCIS-10-A-m-k-n, where:
A designates an adapter
n is the number of fibers
k defines the keying configuration
m defines the mounting configuration

144

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

FOCIS 10 adapter designations A and n are defined by variant position #2. For all variants of this
specification, all adapters shall be duplex configuration, n = 2.
FOCIS 10 adapter mounting configuration m is also defined by variant position #2. Configuration
m = 0 (unspecified mounting) or m = 2 (duplex snap-in flange mounting) may be selected.
Exclusionary keying features shall not be incorporated within this specification. The FOCIS-10 variant
designation k shall be k = 1 for all adapters.

J.1.4.3

TIA 6043 (FOCIS 3) Plug Designation

The designation for a FOCIS 3 Plug is FOCIS-3P-0-1-1-4-0 for multi mode, and FOCIS-3P-0-1-11-0 for single mode, where:
P is the Plug designation
d defines the plug design
n is the number of fibers
k defines the keying arrangement
t defines the ferrule diameter
a is the angle of contact
FOCIS 3 plug designations P, d, n", and a are defined by Variant Position # 2. For all variants of
this Specification, Plugs shall be design = 0 (functional interface option), n = 1 (only a simplex plug is
defined), and the angle of contact shall be 0 degrees, a = 0.
Ferrule diameter tolerance t shall be t = 4 for all multi mode variants, and t = 1 for all single mode
variants.
Exclusionary keying features shall not be incorporated within this Specification. The FOCIS 3 variant
designation k shall be k = 1 for all plugs.
Duplex Clips that link simplex connector plugs and do not impair intermateability or optical performance may be utilized to engage FOCIS 3 Duplex Adapter Interface n = 2.

J.1.5 Optical Fiber Specification


Variant Position # 3 of table I.2 identifies the specified Optical Fiber Type.
Detail Specifications ANSI/EIA/TIA492AAAA or ANSI/EIA/TIA492AAAB for multimode optical fibers, and Detail Specification ANSI/EIA/TIA492CAAA for singlemode optical fibers, define optical fiber specification, classification parameters, and assessment criteria.
Certain configuration parameters and optical performance requirements are classified as attributes
dependent on cable design. They are referenced, but not directly specified within the optical fiber detail specifications. Additional configuration definitions and specification is delegated to a separate
purchasing agreement (i.e., procurement document) named Detail Specification Extension (DSE).

J.1.6 Fiber Optic Communications Cable Specification


Cable Designation is indicated by Variant Position # 6 of table I.2.
TIA and ICEA specifications define generally equivalent requirements in dissimilar formats. ANSI/TIA/EIA472CAAA and ANSI/ICEA S83596 define cable specifications and assessment criteria
for indoor applications. ANSI/TIA/EIA472DAAA and ANSI/ICEA S87640 define equivalent parameters for outdoor applications. Both formats also delegate attributes to be defined by a separate purchase, or procurement document (see 1.5).

145

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

J.1.6.1 Cable Performance Parameters


Each cabled fiber shall meet the specifications of table I.8.

Table I.8 Optical Fiber Transmission Performance Requirements


Optical Fiber
Cable Type

Wavelength
(nm)

50/125 m
62.5/125 m
Single-Mode
Indoor Cable
Single-Mode
Outdoor Cable

850
1300
850
1300
1310
1550
1310
1550

Maximum Attenuation
(dB/km)
3.5
1.5
3.5
1.5
1.0
1.0
0.5
0.5

Minimum Information
Transmission Capacity
(MHzkm)
500
500
160
500
See Note 2
See Note 2

Notes:
1

The information transmission capacity for uncabled optical fibers may be used to demonstrate compliance for this requirement.

Note 2: All single-mode cables shall incorporate a Cut-Off Wavelength of 1270 nm for uncabled fiber
per ANSI/TIA/EIA-455-170.

J.1.6.2 Fiber Coating and Buffer sizes


This cable attribute is to be indicated in Variant Position # 4 of table I.2.

J.1.6.3 Acceptable Fiber Count


This cable attribute is to be indicated by Variant Position #5 of table I.2. Designator codes are based
on configurations defined by the noted detail specifications.

J.1.6.4 Cable Length


This cable attribute is to be indicated in Variant Position # 7 of table I.2. Specify cable length in
meters as defined by figure H.6.

J.1.7

Supplementary information

J.1.7.1 Component and package marking requirements


No marking requirements are mandatory. Optional marking shall conform to the principles of ANSI/TIA/EIA475 and may include the following preferred items and their order of marking:
1) Manufacturer's identification mark
2) Manufacturer's part number
3) Manufacturing date code
4) Variant identification number
5) Type name

J.1.7.2 Color Coding Requirements


Individual fibers and fiber groups shall be identifiable in accordance with ANSI/TIA/EIA 598
Components shall utilize color to visibly distinguish optical fiber types. For compliance with ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-A and ISO/IEC 11801, identify a portion of all multi-mode components with beige;
146

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

identify a portion of all single-mode components with blue. Additional color alternatives may be established by future or additional references.

Table I.9 Variant identification numbers


Number

Variant
P=

XXXXXXX

A=
C=
D=

L=
S=

XXXXXXX

1
2
X

XXXXXXX

H=
C=
S=

XXXXXXX

XXXXXXX

XXXXXXX

XXXXXXX

AB
28,
AH
X=
A=
B=
C=
D=
X=
(digit)=
X=

Description
Variant position #1 indicating Component Arrangement
Kit (Plug)
Adapter
Patchcord
Distribution Cable not connectorized
Variant position #2 indicating Component Configuration
For Patch Cord :
per TIA-604-10 (FOCIS 10): d=2, n=2, a=0, both ends (LC-LC)
Per TIA-604-10 (FOCIS 10), d=2, n=2, a=0, one cable end;
Per TIA-604-3 (FOCIS 3), d=0, n=2, a=0, Two plugs required on this cable
end. (LC-SC)
For Kit (Plug)
Per TIA-604-10 (FOCIS 10), d=2, n=2, a=0, t=1
Per TIA-604-10 (FOCIS 10), d=2, n=2, a=0, t=2
For Premises Cable :
Not used for Distribution Cable Arrangement
For Adapter:
per TIA-604-10 (FOCIS 10): n=2, m=0
(Unspecified mounting style)
per TIA-604-10 (FOCIS 10): n=2, m=0
(duplex RJ-45 snap-in mounting )
Variant position #3 indicating Optical Fiber Type
Multi-mode, 62.5/125 m GRIN per ANSI/TIA/EIA492AAAA
Multi-mode, 50/125 m GRIN per ANSI/TIA/EIA492AAAB
Single-mode, 10/125 m Class IVa Dispersion-Unshifted
per ANSI/TIA/EIA492CAAA
Variant position #4 indicating Coating / Buffer Sizes
A= 250/None, B= 250/900
Variant position #5 indicating Number of Cabled Fibers
2= 2, 4= 4, 6= 6, 8= 8,
A= 12, B= 16, C= 18, D= 20, E= 24, F= S30, G= 36, H= 48
Not Used for Kit Arrangement
Variant position #6 indicating Cable Designation
Indoor Plenum Applications per ANSI/TIA/EIA472CAAA
Optional Indoor Non-Plenum Applications per ANSI/ICEA S-83-596
Outdoor, All-Dielectric Applications per ANSI/TIA/EIA472DAAA
Optional Outdoor Applications per ANSI/ICEA S-87-640
Not Used for Kit Arrangement
Variant position #7 indicating Cable Length
Specify length in meters for C and D Component Arrangements
Not Used for Kit Arrangement

147

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

J.2 OUTLINE DRAWINGS


Cable supports
Crimp sleeves
Duplex yoke
LC Duplex jumper components
FOCIS 10 designation d=2 n=2

Connectors

Figure H.5 FOCIS 10 Kit Arrangements

LC Duplex Adapter
FOCIS 10 designation n=2 m=2 (shown)

Figure H.6 FOCIS 10 Duplex Adapter

Specified Length

Variant L = LC-LC Patch Cord

Variant S = LC-SC Hybrid Patch Cord

Figure H.7 FOCIS 10 pachtch cord arrangements

J.3 Requirements
J.3.1

Dimensional Requirements

All specified connector types, arrangements, and variants shall comply with the dimensional requirements defined by the appropriate fiber optic connector intermateability standard. Applicable mea-

148

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

surements shall be made following termination to cabled optical fibers according to the
manufacturer's recommended procedures.

J.3.2 Performance Requirements


Table 3, Measurement and Performance Requirements, provides mandatory evaluation parameters,
conditions, and procedural information and specifies acceptance criteria limits of this Specification.
FOTP test procedures (ANSI/TIA/EIA-455-XX) define information to be provided for conducting each
test, and the format for reporting results. No sequential test regimen or test specimen reuse is required.

J.3.2.1 Test Specimens


Construct test specimens utilizing randomly selected individual connector set components. Testing
may be conducted in combination with previously qualified mating components, or by concurrent connector set component qualification. Test performance criteria of table I.2 are not intended to utilize
reference components.

J.3.2.2 Test Wavelengths


Test and report optical performance for all multi-mode component arrangements at either 850 or
1300 nm wavelength. Similarly, test and report all single-mode component arrangements at either
1310 or 1550 nm wavelength.

J.3.2.3 Kit Qualification Procedures


Use the following procedure to establish compliance for Kit arrangement components (i.e., those not
typically terminated to optical fibers/cables at the primary stage of manufacture):

1) Fabricate Kit test specimens with optical fiber terminations utilizing manufacturers' recommended field tooling, termination procedures, and inspection techniques.
2) Subject test specimens to all relevant qualification tests and inspection sequences as functionally
equivalent alternatives to factory assembled components.

J.3.2.4 Structural Similarity


Grouping structurally similar components for the purpose of simplified qualification is established by
TIA/EIA475 and is also a provision of this Specification. Structurally similar product groups may be
formed within similar component Arrangements and pluralities to reduce test quantity requirements.
Examples include: 1) components with identical materials, construction, and processes common to
multiple variants; or 2) grouping of similar multifiber cable assemblies with varying numbers of identical cabled fibers or lengths. Multiple manufacturing locations using identical components, materials,
and processes shall not require redundant testing.

J.4 Measurement and performance requirements


J.4.1 Visual and Mechanical Inspection: FOTP 13
Details Size measurement methods: per FOCIS 7
Deviations:
None

J.4.2 Attenuation: FOTP 34


Details Method A2 for multi-mode fiber, Method B for single mode fiber
Fiber Type:
as required per variant
149

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

Cable Type:
Source:
Requirement:
Deviations:

J.4.3

as required per variant


Report nominal wavelength, spectral width
0.75 dB
None

Return Loss: FOTP 107

Details Source:
Wavelength per clause 3.2.3 50 nm maximum
Fiber Type:
as required per variant
Cable Type:
as required per variant
Report DUT termination and interconnect/splice methods utilized
Requirement:
multimode min. loss 20 dB, singlemode min. loss 26 dB
Deviations:
None

J.4.4

Low Temperature: FOTP 188

Details Precondition mated specimen 24 hr. per FOTP 188, clause 5.4.1
Temperature:
10 C
Duration:
4 days
Deviations:
None
Initial Measurements and Performance Requirements:
Insertion Loss:
0.75 dB
Measurements and Performance Requirements During Test:
maximum change in insertion loss: 0.3 dB total
Final Measurements and Performance Requirements:
Insertion Loss:
0.75 dB
Return Loss:
multimode min. loss 20 dB, singlemode min. loss 26 dB

J.4.5

Temperature Life: FOTP 4

Details Test Condition: 60C


Test Time Condition: 14 days
Deviations:
None
Initial Measurements and Performance Requirements:
Insertion Loss:
0.75 dB
Measurements and Performance Requirements During Test:
maximum change in insertion loss:
0.3 dB total
Final Measurements and Performance requirements.
Insertion Loss:
0.75 dB
Return Loss:
multimode min. loss 20 dB, singlemode min. loss 26 dB

J.4.6

Humidity: FOTP 5

Details No preconditioning required in specified test sequence following FOTP 4


Test Method A:
Steady-state, Specimen Mated
Test Condition A:
96 hours (4 days) of 90-95% RH at 40 2 C
Deviations:
None
Initial Measurements and Performance Requirements:
Insertion Loss:
0.75 dB
Measurements and Performance Requirements During Test:
maximum change in insertion loss: 0.4 dB total
150

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

Final Measurements and Performance requirements.


Insertion Loss:
0.75 dB maximum
Return Loss:
multimode min. loss 20 dB, singlemode min. loss 26 dB

J.4.7 Strength of Coupling Mechanism: FOTP 185


Details Tensile Force:
Load Application Rate:
Duration:
Specimen:
Deviations:

33 Newtons (N) at 0 pull angle


25.4 mm/minute
5 seconds minimum
Mated
None

Initial Measurements and Performance Requirements:


Insertion Loss:
0.75 dB
Measurements and Performance Requirements During Test:
None
Final Measurements and Performance Requirements:
Insertion Loss:
0.75 dB
Return Loss:
multimode min. loss 20 dB, singlemode min. loss 26 dB

J.4.8 Durability: FOTP 21


Details Number of Cycles:500
Deviations:
None
Initial Measurements and Performance Requirements:
Insertion Loss:
0.75 dB
Measurements and Performance Requirements During Test:
None
Final Measurements and Performance Requirements:
Insertion Loss:
0.75 dB
Return Loss: multimode min. loss 20 dB, singlemode min. loss 26 dB

J.4.9 Impact: FOTP 2


Detail Method B (Light Service Class): 8 drops from 1.8 meter height
Deviations:
None
Initial Measurements and Performance Requirements:
Insertion Loss:
0.75 dB
Measurements and Performance Requirements During Test:
None
Final Measurements and Performance Requirements:
Insertion Loss:
0.75 dB
Return Loss:
multimode min. loss 20 dB, singlemode min. loss 26 dB

J.4.10

Flex: FOTP 1

Details Applied Weight:


Test fixture rotation cycle:
Manual operation:

0.5 kg per terminated cable sheath;


or 224 g per buffered or coated fiber
0, +90, 0, 90, 0 for 100 cycles
25 cm Distance from Pivot Point to Mandrel Center
7.5 cm nominal Mandrel diameter

Deviations: None
151

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

Initial Measurements and Performance Requirements:


0.75 dB
Insertion Loss:
Measurements and Performance Requirements During Test:
None
Final Measurements and Performance Requirements:
Insertion Loss:
0.75 dB
Return Loss:
multimode min. loss 20 dB, singlemode min. loss 26 dB

J.4.11

Twist: FOTP 36

Details Specimen Mated


Tensile Load:

15 N at 0 pull angle per terminated cable sheath;


or 2.2 N at 0 pull angle per buffered or coated fiber
Rotate through the following cycle:
2.5 revolutions in one direction, reverse for 5 revolutions,
and reverse 2.5 revolutions to the initial position. Repeat 10 times
Deviations:
None

Initial Measurements and Performance Requirements:


Insertion Loss:
0.75 dB
Measurements and Performance Requirements During Test:
None
Final Measurements and Performance Requirements:
Insertion Loss:
0.75 dB
Return Loss:
multimode min. loss 20 dB, singlemode min. loss 26 dB

J.4.12

Cable Retention: FOTP 6

J.4.12.1 Test sequence number 1:


Details Specimen Mated
Tensile Load1 for jacketed optical fiber cables with strength members:
66 N at 0 pull angle per terminated cable sheath; or
2
Tensile Load for buffered or coated fibers:
2.2 N at 0 pull angle per terminated buffered or coated fiber
Duration:
5 seconds minimum
Deviations:
None
Initial Measurements and Performance Requirements:
Insertion Loss:
0.75 dB
Measurements and Performance Requirements During Test:
None
Sequence Ending Measurements and Performance Requirements:
Attenuation 0.5 dB increase and Insertion Loss 0.75 dB
Return Loss:
multimode min. loss 20 dB, singlemode min. loss 26 dB

J.4.12.2 Test sequence number 2:


Details Specimen Mated
Tensile Load1 for jacketed optical fiber cables with strength members:
19.4 N at 90 pull angle per terminated cable sheath; or
2 for buffered or coated fibers:
Tensile Load

152

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

Duration:
Deviations:

2.2 N at 90 pull angle per terminated buffered or coated fiber


5 seconds minimum
None

Initial Measurements and Performance Requirements:


Insertion Loss:
0.75 dB
Measurements and Performance Requirements During Test:
None
Final Measurements and Performance Requirements:
Attenuation 0.5 dB increase and Insertion Loss 0.75 dB
Return Loss:
multimode min. loss 20 dB, singlemode min. loss 26 dB

153

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

Annex K(informative)
MT-RJ Optical Connector Requirements
Fiber optic connector set classificatio:
Type:

Interface: MT-RJ
Configuration: Plug Adapter -- Plug
Coupling Engagement: Latched Push-Pull
Mating Face Limits of Tolerance: ANSI/TIA/EIA-604-12 (FOCIS-12)

Style:

Optical Coupling: PC (Physical Contact)Fiber Retention: as required


Fiber Alignment: Alignment PinCable Retention: as required

Arrangements: Kit (Plug), Adapter, Patch Cord, Distribution Cable


Variants: Number of fibers, optical fiber type, fiber coating / buffer size, cable type,
cable length, hybrid patch cord connector type.
Climatic Category:- 10/60/04 applicable to Connector Set Components
0/50/04 applicable to specified Indoor Cables
- 40/60/04 applicable to specified Outdoor Cable

67 Ref.

67 Ref.

Plug
R25 Min.

Plug

R25 Min

Adapter
Figure K.1 Assembled Connector Set, Type MT-RJ Connector

154

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

K.1 General
The intent of this Specification is to enable end users and manufacturers to uniformly specify fiber optic connector set components and cable assemblies incorporating Type MT-RJ Fiber Optic Connector Interface Standard, ANSI/TIA/EIA 604-12 (FOCIS-12). Application of this specification is intended
to assure component interoperability, and to define recommended application performance for the
physical infrastructure required to support Fibre Channel Physical Interface Standard (FCPI).
This document has been formulated under the cognizance of NCITS Technical Committee T11, Device Level Interfaces.

K.1.1

Scope

Optical fiber connector set components and cable assemblies are specified that comply with ANSI/TIA/EIA 604-12 (FOCIS-12), Fiber Optic Connector Intermateability Standard, Type.

It is the intent of this specification that full intermateability of connector set components will
be realized on the basis that FOCIS 12 establishes the necessary parameters to ensure
intermateability. Connector sets from different sources are considered fully intermateable
when connector parts from one source will mate with complementary parts from other
sources without mechanical interference, while maintaining specified optical performance.
Appropriate applications for components specified by this Specification are fiber optic communications inter-connect, cross-connect, and distribution cabling located within and between buildings in a
campus environment. All in-service optical fibers are connectorized, all connector interfaces are located within building perimeter walls, and network distribution may extend up to and including connection to the communications outlet/optical port of desktop equipment.

K.1.1.1 Suitability for Environmental Conditions


Environmental hazards of intrabuilding interconnection locations are generally benign. ANSI/TIA/EIA475 defines this controlled environment as Environmental Category I and identifies minimum performance criteria. Relevant commercial building wiring standards ANSI/TIA/EIA568A and
ISO/IEC 11801 specify recommended climatic temperature extremes of 10 C to +60 C.
Interbuilding cable placement is also within the stated scope of ANSI/TIA/EIA568A. This application is conditionally supported with stipulation that all connector terminations are located inside building perimeter walls. Suitable applications of specified outside plant cables are limited to continuous
lengths of connectorized interbuilding cables.
Specification and qualification for outdoor placement and operation of passive interconnecting devices is not within the scope of this Specification.

K.1.1.2 Long Link Lengths


Connector set attenuation limits are not intended to also include the intrinsic attenuation present in
long length optical fiber links. To facilitate acceptance criteria of long length cable assemblies, the following procedure may be used: Calculate, from the actual cable length, the maximum allowable attenuation of the specified optical fiber type and operating wavelength. Deduct this allowable intrinsic
loss from the measured cable link attenuation, and report the resultant value for connector attenuation.

K.1.1.3 Quality Assurance

It is the responsibility of the manufacturer to establish quality assurance procedures that will
ensure the product satisfies the requirements of relevant specifications on a continuing
basis. It is not intended that a complete testing program be carried out on every specified
component or cable assembly. When the user wishes to specify acceptance tests or other
155

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

quality procedures, it is essential that agreement be reached between the user and the
manufacturer at the time of ordering.
K.1.2 Related Documents
NOTE Several referenced standards are in a concurrent process of revision or are pending publication, they
are indicated by Italics. Where provisions of an update is significant to this specification, the most current reference is provided with the intent it will supercede prior issues when published.

K.1.2.1 Normative References


[1] EIA/TIA-440-A: Fiber Optic Connector Terminology, January 1989.
[2]

EIA/TIA-455-1: FOTP 1A, Cable Flexing for Fiber Optic Interconnecting devices, Nov. 1988.

[3]

EIA/TIA-455-2: FOTP 2B, Impact Test Measurement for Fiber Optic Devices, Nov. 1990.

[4]

EIA/TIA-455-4: FOTP 4B, Fiber Optic Connector /Component Temperature Life, Sept. 1993.

[5]

EIA/TIA-455-5: FOTP 5B, Humidity Test Procedure for Fiber Optic Connecting Devices, July
1994.

[6]

EIA/TIA-455-6: FOTP 6B, Cable Retention Test Procedure for Fiber Optic Cable Interconnecting Devices, March 1992.

[7]

EIA/TIA-455-13: FOTP 13A, Visual and Mechanical Inspection of Fibers, Cables, Connectors,
and/or Other Fiber Optic Devices, 1995

[8]

EIA-455-21: FOTP 21A, Mating Durability for Fiber Optic Interconnecting Devices, Nov. 1988.

[9]

EIA-455-34: FOTP 34, Interconnection Device Insertion Loss Test, May 1985.

[10] EIA/TIA-455-107: FOTP 107, Return Loss for Fiber Optic components, Feb. 1989
[11] TIA/EIA-455-170: Cable Cutoff Wavelength of Single-Mode Fiber by Transmitted Power, November 1989
[12] EIA/TIA-455-171: FOTP 171, Attenuation by Substitution Measurement - for Short-Length Multimode Graded-Index and Single-Mode Optical Fiber Cable Assemblies, July 1987.
[13] EIA/TIA-455-185: FOTP 185, Strength of Coupling Mechanism for Fiber Optic Interconnecting
Devices, May 1991.
[14] EIA/TIA-455-188: FOTP 188, Low-Temperature Testing of Fiber Optic Components, Jan. 1992
[15] ANSI/TIA/EIA-604: Fiber Optic Connector Intermateability Standards (FOCIS), Nov. 1993
[16] ANSI/TIA/EIA-604-3: FOCIS3, Fiber Optic Connector Intermateability Standard Type SC,
1997.
[17] ANSI/TIA/EIA 604-12: FOCIS 12, Fiber Optic Connector Intermateability Standard Type MTRJ, (Currently pending public review in the development process by TIA FO-6.3 as SP 4172).
[18] ANSI/TIA/EIA-472CAAA, Detail Specification for Indoor Plenum Application Cables, 1993
[19] ANSI/TIA/EIA-472DAAA, Detail Specification for Outdoor, All-Dielectric Application Cables,
1993
[20] ANSI/TIA/EIA-492AAAA: Detail Specification for 62.5m Core Diameter/125m Cladding Diameter Class Ia Multimode, Graded-Index Optical Waveguide Fibers, 1997
[21] ANSI/TIA/EIA-492AAAB: Detail Specification for 50m Core Diameter/125m Cladding Diameter Class Ia Multimode, Graded-Index Optical Waveguide Fibers, 1998

156

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

[22] ANSI/TIA/EIA-492CAAA: Detail Specification for Class Iva Dispersion-Unshifted Singlemode


Optical Fiber, 1997
[23] ANSI/ICEA S835961994, Standard for Fiber Optic Premises Distribution Cable.
[24] ANSI/ICEA S876401992, Standard for Fiber Optic Outside Plant Communications Cable.
K.1.2.2 Informative References
The following documents are informative and may be useful when referring to this specification.
[25] ANSI/TIA/EIA475C: Generic Specification for Fiber Optic Connectors, May 1996

[26] ANSI/TIA/EIA-568B.3: Commercial Building Telecommunications Optical Fiber Wiring Standard, 1999 (Concurrently in process by TIA Subcommittee TR41.8 as TIA PN 3723)
[27] ANSI/TIA/EIA568A: Commercial Building Telecommunications Wiring Standard, 1995.
[28] ISO/IEC 11801: Information technology Generic cabling for customer premises, May 1995.
K.1.2.3 Definitions
Note: Superscript source references are included for informational purposes only during the ballot
process. They will not appear in the published specification.

K.1.2.3.1

Adapter: the element of the connector assembly that joins two plugs.

K.1.2.3.2

Backbone: a facility (e.g., pathway, cable or conductor) between telecommunications


closets, or floor distribution terminals, the entrance facilities, and the equipment rooms
within or between buildings.3)

K.1.2.3.3

Backbone cable: see backbone.3)

K.1.2.3.4

Cable assembly, optical: an optical cable that is connector terminated. Generally, an


optical cable that has been terminated by a manufacturer and is ready for installation.1)

K.1.2.3.5

Cabling: a combination of all cables, wire, cords, and connecting hardware.3)

K.1.2.3.6

Centralized cabling: A cabling configuration from the work area to a centralized crossconnect using pull through cables, an interconnect, or splice in the telecommunications
closet.6)

K.1.2.3.7

Cord (Fiber Optic): a flexible cable assembly with a tensile strength member for each
connector. See Work area cable (cord); Patch cord, Equipment Cable (Cord).[new]

K.1.2.3.8

Distribution cable: the cable/conductor from the auxiliary telecommunications disconnect


outlet/connector or the distribution device in a customers premises to the backbone
facility or the point of demarcation.5)

K.1.2.3.9

Equipment cable (cord): a cable or cable assembly used to connect telecommunications


equipment to horizontal or backbone cabling. 3)

K.1.2.3.10 Fiber Optic Connector Set: The total connector components required to provide
demountable coupling between two or more optical fiber cables.2)
K.1.2.3.11 Horizontal cabling: the cabling between and including the telecommunications
outlet/connector and the horizontal cross-connect. 3)
K.1.2.3.12 Kit, Connector Set (fiber optics): A connector set that is unterminated.2)
K.1.2.3.13 Link: a transmission path between two points, not including terminal equipment, work
area cables, and equipment cables.3)
157

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

K.1.2.3.14

Patchcord connector set (fiber optics): an assembly with the plug connector component
and/or Socket connector component assembled on both ends of a length of fiber/cable.2)

K.1.2.3.15

Work area cable (cord): a cable assembly connecting the telecommunications


outlet/connector to the terminal equipment. 3)

1)

from TIA 440-A

2)

from TIA 475-C

3)

from TIA 568-A

4)

from TIA 568-A text, Fig. 12-3, Annex F

5)

from TIA 41.8.5 WG accepted compilation 3/96

6)

from draft TIA 568B.3, 8/24/98

K.1.3 Product Identification


A non-mandatory identification system is provided that uniquely identifies each product configuration
associated with this specification by a coded alphanumeric sequence.
table K.2 summarizes designated component identification options.
The following example of a complete product identification number is comprised of seven coded variant positions as indicated: CGHA2A15
NOTE This identification sequence is compatible with conventions used to generate ANSI/TIA/EIA and
ISO/IEC Detail Specification numbers. The detail specification number is inserted before the product number
to form a complete sequence.

(example: ANSI/TIA/EIA 47500_ _- CGHA2A15)


K.1.3.1 Variant Identification Numbers
The variant identification numbering sequence designates alternative product configurations. Seven
variant position numbers are designated to generate a complete, unique Product Identification Number. Variant Identification Numbers are summarized in table K.2.
Variant position #1 indicates Component Arrangement:

Table K.1 Variant position #1 indicates Component Arrangement


Designator

Component Arrangement

Kit (Plug)

Adapter

Patch Cord

Distribution Cable Not Connectorized

158

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

Table K.2 Variant position #2 indicates Component Configuration


Designator

Component
Arrangement

Component Configuration

MT-RJ Patch Cord


(MT-RJ MT-RJ)

Interface per TIA-604-12 (FOCIS-12), d=1, n=2, a=0, c=2 Both


cable ends

MT-RJ Patch Cord


(MT-RJ MT-RJ)

Interface per TIA-604-12 (FOCIS-12), d=1, n=2, a=0, c=1 Both


cable ends

MT-RJ Patch Cord


(MT-RJ MT-RJ)

Interface per TIA-604-12 (FOCIS-12), d=1, n=2, a=0, c=1 One


cable end, c=2 One cable end

Hybrid Patch Cord


(MT-RJ SC)

per TIA-604-12 (FOCIS-12), d=1, n=2, a=0, c=2 one cable end;
per TIA-604-3 (FOCIS-3), d=1, n=2, a=1 two plugs required on this
cable end.

per TIA-604-12 (FOCIS-12), d=1, n=2, a=0, c=1, t=1

per TIA-604-12 (FOCIS-12), d=1, n=2, a=0, c=1

Kit (Plug)

per TIA-604-12 (FOCIS-12), d=1, n=2, a=0, c=2, t=1

per TIA-604-12 (FOCIS-12), d=1, n=2, a=0, c=2, t=2

Adapter

Not used for Distribution Cable Arrangement

per TIA-604-12 (FOCIS-12), k=1, m=0

:
Table K.3 Variant position #3 indicates the Optical Fiber Type
Designator

Optical Fiber Type

Multi-mode, 62.5/125 m GRIN per ANSI/TIA/EIA-492AAAA

Multi-mode, 50/125 m GRIN per ANSI/TIA/EIA-492AAAB

Single-Mode, 10/125 m Class IVa Dispersion-Unshifted per ANSI/TIA/EIA-492CAAA

Table K.4 Variant position #4 indicates the fiber Coating / Buffer Sizes
Designator

Fiber Coating / Buffer Diameters

250 m Coating / No Buffer

250 m Coating / 900 m Buffer

Table K.5 Variant position #5 indicates the number of cabled fibers


Designator Code

Acceptable fiber
count

Designator
Code

Acceptable
fiber count

Designator
Code

Acceptable
fiber count

16

30

18

36

20

48

12

24

Not Applicable for Kit (plug)

159

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

Table K.6 Variant position #6 indicates the Cable Designation


Designator

Cable Designation

Indoor Plenum Applications per ANSI/TIA/EIA-472CAAA

Optional Indoor Non-Plenum Applications per ANSI/ICEA S-83-596

Outdoor, All-Dielectric Applications per ANSI/TIA/EIA-472DAAA

Optional Outdoor Applications per ANSI/ICEA S-87-640

Not Applicable for Kit (plug)

Table K.7 Variant position #7 indicates the Cable Length


Designator

Cable Designation

digit(s)

Cable length in meters

Not Applicable for Kit (plug)

K.1.4 TIA 604 (FOCIS) Connector Specifications


The broader scope of FOCIS standards provide alternative component variants that are not compatible in all combinations. As a result, the following attribute designation constraints shall apply to all
variants of this Specification:

K.1.4.1 TIA 604-12 (FOCIS-12) Plug Designation


The complete designation for a FOCIS 12 Plug is FOCIS 12 P d - n - k - a - c - t
Where:
P designates that it is the Plug
d defines the plug design
n is the number of fibers
k defines the keying configuration
a is the angle of contact
c designates whether the Plug interface has pins or alignment structures
t designates the alignment pin/alignment structure diameter
FOCIS 12 plug designations P, n, and a are defined by variant #2 position. For all variants of
this specification, all plugs are with two fibers, d=1, n=2 and the angle of fiber contact shall be 0
degrees, a=0. Plugs with alignment pins are c=1, those without alignment pins are, c=2.
Alignment pins and structure tolerances shall be t=1 for singlemode variants and t=2 for multimode variants. Exclusionary keying features shall not be incorporated within this specification. The FOCIS-12 variant designation k shall be k=1 for all adapters.

160

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

K.1.5

TIA 604-12 (FOCIS-12) Adapter Designation

The complete designation for a FOCIS 12 is FOCIS-12-A-k-m where:


A

designates an adapter

defines the keying configuration

defines the mounting position

FOCIS 12 adapter designations A are defined by variant position #2.


FOCIS-12 adapter mounting configuration m is also defined by variant position #2. The only mounting option specified is m=0.
Exclusionary keying features shall not be incorporated with this specification. The FOCIS-12 variant
designation k shall be k=1 for all adapters.

K.1.5.1 1.4.3TIA 6043 (FOCIS 3) Plug Designation


The designation for a FOCIS 3 Plug is FOCIS-3P-0-1-1-4-0 for multi mode, and FOCIS-3P-0-1-11-0 for single mode, where:
P is the Plug designation
d defines the plug design
n is the number of fibers
k defines the keying arrangement
t defines the ferrule diameter
a is the angle of contact
FOCIS 3 plug designations P, d, n", and a are defined by Variant Position # 2. For all variants of
this Specification, Plugs shall be design = 0 (functional interface option), n = 1 (only a simplex plug is
defined), and the angle of contact shall be 0 degrees, a = 0.
Ferrule diameter tolerance t shall be t = 4 for all multi mode variants, and t = 1 for all single mode
variants.
Exclusionary keying features shall not be incorporated within this Specification. The FOCIS 3 variant
designation k shall be k = 1 for all plugs.
Duplex Clips that link simplex connector plugs and do not impair intermateability or optical performance may be utilized to engage FOCIS 3 Duplex Adapter Interface n = 2.

K.1.6

Optical Fiber Specification

Variant Position # 3 of table K.2 identifies the specified Optical Fiber Type.
Detail Specifications ANSI/EIA/TIA492AAAA or ANSI/EIA/TIA492AAAB for multimode optical fibers, and Detail Specification ANSI/EIA/TIA492CAAA for singlemode optical fibers, define optical fiber specification, classification parameters, and assessment criteria.
Certain configuration parameters and optical performance requirements are classified as attributes
dependent on cable design. They are referenced, but not directly specified within the optical fiber detail specifications. Additional configuration definitions and specification is delegated to a separate
purchasing agreement (i.e., procurement document) named Detail Specification Extension (DSE).

161

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

K.1.7 Fiber Optic Communications Cable Specification


Cable Designation is indicated by Variant Position # 6 of table K.2.
TIA and ICEA specifications define generally equivalent requirements in dissimilar formats. ANSI/TIA/EIA472CAAA and ANSI/ICEA S83596 define cable specifications and assessment criteria
for indoor applications. ANSI/TIA/EIA472DAAA and ANSI/ICEA S87640 define equivalent parameters for outdoor applications. Both formats also delegate attributes to be defined by a separate purchase, or procurement document (see 1.5).

K.1.7.1 Cable Performance Parameters


Each cabled fiber shall meet the specifications of table K.8.

Table K.8 Optical Fiber Transmission Performance Requirements


Optical Fibe
Cable Type

Wavelength (nm)

Maximum Attenuation
(dB/km)

Minimum Information
Transmission Capacity
(MHzkm)

850

3.5

500

1300

1.5

500

850

3.5

160

1300

1.5

500

Single-Mode

1310

1.0

See Note 2

Indoor Cable

1550

1.0

Single-Mode

1310

0.5

Outdoor Cable

1550

0.5

50/125 m
62.5/125 m

See Note 2

Notes:
1

The information transmission capacity for uncabled optical fibers may be used to demonstrate compliance for this requirement.

Note 2: All single-mode cables shall incorporate a Cut-Off Wavelength of 1270 nm for uncabled fiber
per ANSI/TIA/EIA-455-170.

K.1.7.2 Fiber Coating and Buffer sizes


This cable attribute is to be indicated in Variant Position # 4 of table K.2.

K.1.7.3 Acceptable Fiber Count


This cable attribute is to be indicated by Variant Position #5 of table K.2. Designator codes are based
on configurations defined by the noted detail specifications.

K.1.7.4 Cable Length


This cable attribute is to be indicated in Variant Position # 7 of table K.2. Specify cable length in
meters as defined by figure K.3.

162

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

K.1.8

SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION

K.1.8.1 Component and Package Marking Requirements


No marking requirements are mandatory. Optional marking shall conform to the principles of ANSI/TIA/EIA475 and may include the following preferred items and their order of marking:
1) Manufacturer's identification mark
2) Manufacturer's part number
3) Manufacturing date code
4) Variant identification number
5) Type name

K.1.8.2 Color Coding Requirements


Individual fibers and fiber groups shall be identifiable in accordance with ANSI/TIA/EIA 598
Components shall utilize color to visibly distinguish optical fiber types. For compliance with ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-A and ISO/IEC 11801, identify a portion of all multi-mode components with beige;
identify a portion of all single-mode components with blue. Additional color alternatives may be established by future or additional references

163

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

Table K.9 Variant identification numbers


Number

XXXXXXX

Variant

Description

P=
A=
C=
D=

Variant position #1 indicating Component Arrangement


Kit (Plug)
Adapter
Patch Cord (individual conn strain relief, two terminated plugs)
Distribution Cable Not Connectorized
Variant position #2 indicating Component Configuration

P=
H1=
M=

XXXXXXX

N=

For Patch Cord :


Interface per TIA-604-12 (FOCIS-12), d=0, n=2, a=0, c=2 Both cable ends
Interface per TIA-604-12 (FOCIS-12), d=0, n=2, a=0, c=1 Both cable ends
Interface per TIA-604-12 (FOCIS-12), d=0, n=2, a=0, c=1 One cable end, c=2
One cable end
per TIA-604-12 (FOCIS-12), d=0, n=2, a=0, c=2 one cable end;
per TIA-604-3 (FOCIS-3), d=0, n=2, a=0 two plugs required on this cable end.

0=
1=
2=
3=

For Kit (Plug)


per TIA-604-12 (FOCIS-12), d=0, n=2, a=0, c=1
per TIA-604-12 (FOCIS-12), d=0, n=2, a=0, c=2
per TIA-604-12 (FOCIS-12), d=0, n=2, a=0, c=2, t=1
per TIA-604-12 (FOCIS-12), d=0, n=2, a=0, c=2, t=2

For Premises Cable :


Not used for Distribution Cable Arrangement
Variant position #3 indicating Optical Fiber Type

XXXXXXX

H=

Multi-mode, 62.5/125 m GRIN per ANSI/TIA/EIA492AAAA

C=

Multi-mode, 50/125 m GRIN per ANSI/TIA/EIA492AAAB

S=

Single-mode, 10/125 m Class IVa Dispersion-Unshifted


per ANSI/TIA/EIA492CAAA
Variant position #4 indicating Coating / Buffer Sizes

XXXXXXX
AB

A= 250/None, B= 250/900
Variant position #5 indicating Number of Cabled Fibers

XXXXXXX

28,
AH

2= 2, 4= 4, 6= 6, 8= 8,
A= 12, B= 16, C= 18, D= 20, E= 24, F= S30, G= 36, H= 48

X=

Not Used for Kit Arrangement


Variant position #6 indicating Cable Designation

A=

Indoor Plenum Applications per ANSI/TIA/EIA472CAAA

B=

Optional Indoor Non-Plenum Applications per ANSI/ICEA S-83-596

C=

Outdoor, All-Dielectric Applications per ANSI/TIA/EIA472DAAA

D=

Optional Outdoor Applications per ANSI/ICEA S-87-640

X=

Not Used for Kit Arrangement

XXXXXXX

Variant position #7 indicating Cable Length

XXXXXXX

(digit)=

Specify length in meters for C and D Component Arrangements

X=

Not Used for Kit Arrangement

164

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

K.2 OUTLINE DRAWINGS

Variant "O" MT-RJ Plug Kit

Variant "O1" MT-RJ Plug Kit

Figure K.2 MT-RJ Plug Kit Arrangements

Figure K.3 Variant A MT-RJ Adapter

165

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

K.3 Requirements
K.3.1 Dimensional Requirements
All specified connector types, arrangements, and variants shall comply with the dimensional requirements defined by the appropriate fiber optic connector intermateability standard. Applicable measurements shall be made following termination to cabled optical fibers according to the
manufacturer's recommended procedures.

K.3.2 Performance Requirements


Table 3, Measurement and Performance Requirements, provides mandatory evaluation parameters,
conditions, and procedural information and specifies acceptance criteria limits of this Specification.
FOTP test procedures (ANSI/TIA/EIA-455-XX) define information to be provided for conducting each
test, and the format for reporting results. No sequential test regimen or test specimen reuse is required.

K.3.2.1 Test Specimens


Construct test specimens utilizing randomly selected individual connector set components. Testing
may be conducted in combination with previously qualified mating components, or by concurrent connector set component qualification. Test performance criteria of table K.2 are not intended to utilize
reference components.

K.3.2.2 Test Wavelengths


Test and report optical performance for all multi-mode component arrangements at either 850 or
1300 nm wavelength. Similarly, test and report all single-mode component arrangements at either
1310 or 1550 nm wavelength.

K.3.2.3 Kit Qualification Procedures


Use the following procedure to establish compliance for Kit arrangement components (i.e., those not
typically terminated to optical fibers/cables at the primary stage of manufacture):
1) Fabricate Kit test specimens with optical fiber terminations utilizing manufacturers' recommended field tooling, termination procedures, and inspection techniques.
2) Subject test specimens to all relevant qualification tests and inspection sequences as functionally equivalent alternatives to factory assembled components.

K.3.2.4 Structural Similarity


Grouping structurally similar components for the purpose of simplified qualification is established by
TIA/EIA475 and is also a provision of this Specification. Structurally similar product groups may be
formed within similar component Arrangements and pluralities to reduce test quantity requirements.
Examples include: 1) components with identical materials, construction, and processes common to
multiple variants; or 2) grouping of similar multifiber cable assemblies with varying numbers of identical cabled fibers or lengths. Multiple manufacturing locations using identical components, materials,
and processes shall not require redundant testing.

166

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

K.4 Measurement and performance requirements


K.4.1

Visual and mechanical inspection: FOTP 13

Details Size measurement methods: per FOCIS 7


Deviations:
None

K.4.2

Attenuation: FOTP 34

Details Method A2 for multi-mode fiber, Method B for single mode fiber
Fiber Type:
as required per variant
Cable Type:
as required per variant
Source:
Report nominal wavelength, spectral width
Requirement:
0.75 dB
Deviations:
None

K.4.3

Return Loss: FOTP 107

Details Source:
Wavelength per clause 3.2.3 50 nm maximum
Fiber Type:
as required per variant
Cable Type:
as required per variant
Report DUT termination and interconnect/splice methods utilized
Requirement:
multimode min. loss 20 dB, singlemode min. loss 26 dB
Deviations:
None

K.4.4

Low Temperature: FOTP 188

Details Precondition mated specimen 24 hr. per FOTP 188, clause 5.4.1
Temperature:
10 C
Duration:
4 days
Deviations:
None
Initial Measurements and Performance Requirements:
Insertion Loss:
0.75 dB
Measurements and Performance Requirements During Test:
maximum change in insertion loss: 0.3 dB total
Final Measurements and Performance Requirements:
Insertion Loss:
0.75 dB
Return Loss:
multimode min. loss 20 dB, singlemode min. loss 26 dB

K.4.5

Temperature Life: FOTP 4

Details Test Condition: 60C


Test Time Condition: 14 days
Deviations:
None
Initial Measurements and Performance Requirements:
Insertion Loss:
0.75 dB
Measurements and Performance Requirements During Test:
maximum change in insertion loss:
0.3 dB total
Final Measurements and Performance requirements.
Insertion Loss: 0.75 dB
Return Loss:multimode min. loss 20 dB, singlemode min. loss 26 dB

167

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

K.4.6 Humidity: FOTP 5


Details No preconditioning required in specified test sequence following FOTP 4
Test Method A:
Steady-state, Specimen Mated
Test Condition A:
96 hours (4 days) of 90-95% RH at 40 2 C
Deviations:
None
Initial Measurements and Performance Requirements:
Insertion Loss:
0.75 dB
Measurements and Performance Requirements During Test:
maximum change in insertion loss: 0.4 dB total
Final Measurements and Performance requirements.
Insertion Loss:
0.75 dB maximum
Return Loss:
multimode min. loss 20 dB, singlemode min. loss 26 dB

K.4.7 Strength of Coupling Mechanism: FOTP 185


Details Tensile Force:
Load Application Rate:
Duration:
Specimen:
Deviations:

33 Newtons (N) at 0 pull angle


25.4 mm/minute
5 seconds minimum
Mated
None

Initial Measurements and Performance Requirements:


Insertion Loss:
0.75 dB
Measurements and Performance Requirements During Test:
None
Final Measurements and Performance Requirements:
Insertion Loss:
0.75 dB
Return Loss:
multimode min. loss 20 dB, singlemode min. loss 26 dB

K.4.8 Durability: FOTP 21


Details Number of Cycles:500
Deviations:
None
Initial Measurements and Performance Requirements:
Insertion Loss:
0.75 dB
Measurements and Performance Requirements During Test:
None
Final Measurements and Performance Requirements:
Insertion Loss:
0.75 dB
Return Loss: multimode min. loss 20 dB, singlemode min. loss 26 dB

K.4.9 Impact: FOTP 2


Detail Method B (Light Service Class): 8 drops from 1.8 meter height
Deviations:
None
Initial Measurements and Performance Requirements:
Insertion Loss:
0.75 dB
Measurements and Performance Requirements During Test:
None

168

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

Final Measurements and Performance Requirements:


Insertion Loss:
0.75 dB
Return Loss:
multimode min. loss 20 dB, singlemode min. loss 26 dB

K.4.10 Flex: FOTP 1


Details Applied Weight:
Test fixture rotation cycle:
Manual operation:

0.5 kg per terminated cable sheath;


or 224 g per buffered or coated fiber
0, +90, 0, 90, 0 for 100 cycles
25 cm Distance from Pivot Point to Mandrel Center
7.5 cm nominal Mandrel diameter

Deviations: None
Initial Measurements and Performance Requirements:
Insertion Loss:
0.75 dB
Measurements and Performance Requirements During Test:
None
Final Measurements and Performance Requirements:
Insertion Loss:
0.75 dB
Return Loss:
multimode min. loss 20 dB, singlemode min. loss 26 dB

K.4.11 Twist: FOTP 36


Details Specimen Mated
Tensile Load:

15 N at 0 pull angle per terminated cable sheath;


or 2.2 N at 0 pull angle per buffered or coated fiber
Rotate through the following cycle:
2.5 revolutions in one direction, reverse for 5 revolutions,
and reverse 2.5 revolutions to the initial position. Repeat 10 times
Deviations:
None

Initial Measurements and Performance Requirements:


Insertion Loss:
0.75 dB
Measurements and Performance Requirements During Test:
None
Final Measurements and Performance Requirements:
Insertion Loss:
0.75 dB
Return Loss:
multimode min. loss 20 dB, singlemode min. loss 26 dB

K.4.12 Cable Retention: FOTP 6


K.4.12.1 Test sequence number 1:
Details Specimen Mated
Tensile Load1 for jacketed optical fiber cables with strength members:
66 N at 0 pull angle per terminated cable sheath; or
2
Tensile Load for buffered or coated fibers:
2.2 N at 0 pull angle per terminated buffered or coated fiber
Duration:
5 seconds minimum
Deviations:
None
Initial Measurements and Performance Requirements:
Insertion Loss:
0.75 dB

169

XX-00-199x Physical Interface 7.2 April 9, 2000

Measurements and Performance Requirements During Test:


None
Sequence Ending Measurements and Performance Requirements:
Attenuation 0.5 dB increase and Insertion Loss 0.75 dB
Return Loss:
multimode min. loss 20 dB, singlemode min. loss 26 dB

K.4.12.2 Test sequence number 2:


Details Specimen Mated
Tensile Load1 for jacketed optical fiber cables with strength members:
19.4 N at 90 pull angle per terminated cable sheath; or
2
Tensile Load for buffered or coated fibers:
2.2 N at 90 pull angle per terminated buffered or coated fiber
Duration:
5 seconds minimum
Deviations: None
Initial Measurements and Performance Requirements:
Insertion Loss:
0.75 dB
Measurements and Performance Requirements During Test:
None
Final Measurements and Performance Requirements:
Attenuation 0.5 dB increase and Insertion Loss 0.75 dB
Return Loss:
multimode min. loss 20 dB, singlemode min. loss 26 dB

170

Вам также может понравиться